JP6502894B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device by the establishment of a predetermined variable display start condition, such as the game ball passing through the start area provided in the game area where the launched game ball can roll. Variable display control means is provided to perform variable display control and control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variable display is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the identification information displayed and derived is a predetermined combination. Pachinko gaming machines are known that are adapted to shift to a big hit gaming state (a so-called "big hit").

  There is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on the gaming area in such a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing ( Patent Document 1).

JP, 2005-237864, A

  By the way, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, effects are usually performed based on start winnings etc., but the movement of the game ball up to the winning and the contents of the effects do not correspond, and both are separated It was common to have. Even in the technology for tracking the movement of the gaming ball as described above, the device for appropriately reflecting the tracking result of the gaming ball to the effect is insufficient, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect of the effect .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) A game board (e.g., game board 12) including a game area (e.g., game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down;
A plurality of areas (for example, specific areas 3038A and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) including specific areas which are advantageous to the player and in which gaming balls which have flowed down the gaming area can enter, respectively;
An imaging device (for example, a CCD camera 1000) arranged to be capable of imaging the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (for example, sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (for example, the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31);
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the effect is produced in a manner that suggests the probability that the one game ball will enter the specific area among the plurality of areas. Effect executing means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93)
Equipped with
One game ball in a frame image has an area according to the distance from the photographing device to the game ball.

  According to the invention of (1), a plurality of continuous frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by photographing the gaming area, and the positions of the gaming balls included in each frame image are specified. Then, based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, an effect is performed in a mode that suggests the probability that the one game ball enters the specific area. As described above, by specifying the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image, it is possible to associate the position of the gaming ball with the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area and reflect it in the effect mode. , Can enhance the rendering effect.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above,
The game ball having flowed down the game area is equipped with a winning device (for example, the second big winning opening 54) that can enter the ball,
In the plurality of areas (for example, the specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), one gaming ball having entered the winning device enters one of the plurality of areas. It is provided so that the ball is possible,
The position specifying means is
In a plurality of frame images obtained by photographing the game area after one game ball enters the winning device, the position of the one game ball included in each frame image is specified,
The effect executing means is
Based on the position of the one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, an effect corresponding to a change in the position of the one game ball after entering the winning device is executed.
It is characterized by

  According to the invention of (2), the plurality of areas including the specific area are provided such that one game ball having entered the winning device can enter one of the plurality of areas. ing. And, the specification of the position of the gaming ball is performed in a plurality of frame images obtained after one gaming ball enters the winning device, in particular, based on the specified position of the gaming ball. An effect is performed according to the position change after entering the winning device. Thereby, since it is possible to reflect the movement of the gaming ball after entering the winning device in the effect mode, the effect can be further enhanced.

  According to the present invention, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

It is an explanatory view for explaining a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is an appearance perspective view of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing a game board of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the range image | photographed by the CCD camera. It is a figure which shows the range image | photographed by the CCD camera. It is a block diagram showing the circuit composition of the pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of operation | movement (generation operation | movement of various requests) at the time of animation request construction. (A) is a signal flow figure at the time of speaker drive (sound reproduction). (B) is a signal flow figure at the time of LED drive (lighting / extinguishing). It is a figure showing a hit random number judgment table used in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big hit kind determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the power activation performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening winning a prize detection processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows main control main processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows time reduction and probability variation number subtraction processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end interval process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control processing performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the subcontrol circuit main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the button input interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the camera imaging | video analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the image before performing projective transformation. (B) is a figure which shows the image after performing projective transformation. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving average filter. It is a figure which shows an example of a weighted averaging filter. It is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls a game area. It is a figure which shows the process in which a difference image (1) is acquired from the frame image image | photographed at time T1, and the frame image image | photographed at time T2. It is a figure which shows the process in which a difference image (2) is acquired from the frame image image | photographed at time T2, and the frame image image | photographed at time T3. It is a figure which shows the process in which the game ball in time T2 is extracted from difference image (1) and difference image (2). It is a figure which shows a masking area | region. It is a figure which shows an injection area | region and a discharge area | region. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating allocation of ID with respect to a game ball. (A) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in time T2. (B) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in time T3. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the search range on the basis of the position of the game ball in time T2. (A) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in time T2. (B) is a figure which shows the position of the game ball in time T3. It is a figure which shows the search range on the basis of the position of the game ball in time T2. It is a figure which shows a mode that ball clogging has generate | occur | produced on the game board by several game balls. It is a flow chart which shows processing concerning detection of clogging / disappearance performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure for explaining a vanishing point and a zone of vanishing detection. (B) is a figure which shows a mode that ball clogging generate | occur | produced. (C) is a figure for explaining an area of overlapping and overlapping detection of game balls. It is an explanatory view explaining a functional flow in a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an internal structure in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and is a perspective view of the state which closed the middle door. It is an internal structure in the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and is a perspective view of the state which opened the middle door. It is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet in the pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door in the pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the moving path | route of a medal | token in case a medal | token selector guides a medal | token to a hopper apparatus. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a block block diagram of the whole circuit with which the pachislot game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a main control circuit of a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a sub control circuit of a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows main control main processing performed in a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows main control main processing performed in a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing performed in the pachislot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows communication data transmission processing performed in a pachislot machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the demonstration command transmission process performed in the pachislot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of a roulette device. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the size of the game ball in a ball | bowl position image. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the size of the game ball in the ball | bowl position image, and the width of a search range. It is a figure which shows a search range setting table. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example in case a search range is expanded. It is a figure showing an example in case a search range is expanded. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game-medium tracking process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows the process in which an AND image of a difference image (1) and a difference image (2) is acquired. It is a figure which shows the process in which the game ball in time T2 is extracted from the AND image and effect LED single-piece | unit image which were acquired by FIG. It is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a figure which shows the process in which the image of 2nd flame | frame other than presentation LED is acquired. It is a figure which shows the process in which a difference image (1) is acquired from the image of 2nd frame other than presentation LED, and the image of 1st frame. It is a figure which shows the process in which a difference image (2) is acquired from the image of 2nd frame other than presentation LED, and the image of 3rd frame. It is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between front and back frames. It is a flow chart which shows processing concerning detection of clogging / disappearance performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating a ball clogging mark. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region of ball clogging elimination detection. It is a flow chart which shows processing concerning detection of clogging / disappearance performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the clogging elimination detection performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the area | region of ball clogging elimination detection. It is a flowchart which shows the camera imaging | video analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process which concerns on the error determination regarding the ball movement performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the movement distance of a game ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure for implement | achieving V winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the vicinity area | region of the chrone contained in the image image | photographed by the CCD camera, and a stage. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows a mode that the discharge area | region is set with respect to a specific area | region and a non-specific area | region. It is a figure which shows a presentation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information judging processing performed in a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball moves on a clone. (B) is a figure which shows a mode that a game ball rolls on a stage. It is a figure which shows a presentation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a mode that the discharge area | region is set with respect to the ball | bowl passage. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a partial disassembled perspective view of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the projector unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the projector projection content determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation which used the projector. It is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an appearance perspective view of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic side view which shows the state projected from a projection means to a projection area | region.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Function flow]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by the user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, a payout control process of the game ball is performed. In addition, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and an ordinary symbol game using an ordinary symbol.

  When a "big hit" in a special symbol game or a normal symbol game results in a "hit", the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control processing is easily performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, special symbol start winning which is one condition for performing variable display of special symbol in special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of normal symbol in normal symbol game It also includes a certain normal symbol start winning game.

  Note that "variable display" as used in the present specification is a concept that can be displayed in a variable manner, for example, "variation display" that is actually displayed as it is changed, or "stop display that is actually stopped and displayed And so on.

  In "variable display", for example, "derivative display" can be performed in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the “variable display” to the “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

  Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

  (1) When there is a special symbol starting winning in the special symbol game, the random number value (the big hit determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value) is extracted and extracted from the big hit determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. The respective random number values are stored (refer to the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 1).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is established. In this determination processing, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the special symbol start winning, and the condition to start the variable display of the special symbol is established with the random number value stored as one condition. judge.

  Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random number value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination of whether or not to make the "big hit" is performed. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this processing, the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state is determined.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random pattern value, the result of the above-described big hit determination, and the special symbol to be displayed for stop described above are referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, random number values are extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number values, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the special symbol to be displayed in the stop mentioned above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol mentioned above are referred to. The effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Next, a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol as a result of the determined big hit determination. And, production control processing which performs specified production is executed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is to be made. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" has been made, a big hit game control process for playing a big hit game is executed. In the big hit game, the possibility of the various winnings mentioned above increases. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" has not been made, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been made, or if the big hit game control process has ended, a game state transition control process is performed to shift the game state. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state at the normal time which is different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As the gaming state at the normal time, for example, in the above-described jackpot determination, the gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation gaming state") or special symbol start winning is easily obtained The gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving gaming state") and the like can be mentioned. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol, and thereafter, the various types of processing of the special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning while displaying the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random number value, symbol determination random number value, etc.) acquired at the start winning combination ) Is put on hold.

  That is, when the game ball wins a starting prize during the variation display of the special symbol, the variable display (variation display) of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and after the variation display of the special symbol currently being executed is ended. Variable display of the special symbol held is started. Below, the variable display of the special symbol held is also referred to as a "holding ball".

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol start winnings (first start opening winning and second starting opening winning) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting winning You can get hold ball of. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight holding balls can be obtained.

  In addition, although the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment does not show in FIG. 1, it determines the hit (the presence or absence of "big hit" winning) of the holding ball based on the information of the holding ball mentioned above, and further, the judgment result It may have a function of performing a predetermined effect based on it, that is, a preread effect function.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol starting winning in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. Processing flow).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is established. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol starting winning, and the condition to start the variable display of the normal symbol is established with the random number value stored as one condition. judge.

  Then, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and a hit determination is made as to whether or not to make it a "hit". Thereafter, fluctuation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed with reference to the determined result of the hit determination and the variation pattern of the normal symbol.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not a "hit" is to be made. In this determination process, when it is determined that "hit" is to be made, a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

  In the hit game control process, the possibility of the various winnings mentioned above, in particular, the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the gaming ball in the special symbol game is increased. On the other hand, if it is determined that "hit" is not made, the hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, determination processing as to whether or not to start variable symbol display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, various processing of the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing is repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball according to conditions such as whether or not the "big hit" in the special symbol game, the transition state of the gaming state, or the "hit" in the normal symbol game. The ease of treatment varies.

  In the present embodiment, a soft random number system that generates random number values by executing a program is used as a method of extracting various random number values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, random number values from counters (so-called ring counters) in the random number generator. A hard random number system for extracting H may be adopted as an extraction system of various random number values described above.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent extraction of the same random value in a predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine. In the following description, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is forward, the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is backward, and the left side is left as viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, unless otherwise specified. Direction, right side viewed from the front of pachinko gaming machine 1 right direction, upper side of pachinko gaming machine 1 upward, downward direction of pachinko gaming machine 1 downward, clockwise direction viewing pachinko gaming machine 1 from front Will be described as a clockwise direction, and a counterclockwise direction as a counterclockwise direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a main body 2, a base door 3 attached to the main body 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a glass door attached to the base door 3 so as to be openable and closable. And 4.

[Body]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-like member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 4). The main body 2 is formed of, for example, a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is formed of a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the base door 3 is pivoted around one side edge of the main body 2 as an axis. The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  The base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3a as shown in FIG. The opening 3a is formed over a region from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper side, and is formed so as to occupy most of the region.

  Further, the speaker 11, the game board 12, the dish unit 14, the launcher 15, the payout unit 16, and the substrate unit 17 can be attached to the base door 3. The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the game board 12. The liquid crystal display device 13 may not be attached to the game board 12 and may be disposed on the back side of the game board 12 in a state where there is an interval with the game board 12.

  The speaker 11 is disposed at the upper portion (near the upper end portion) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and is disposed to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is formed of a plate-shaped resin member having light transparency. In addition, as resin which has light transmittance, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacryl resin etc. can be used, for example.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12 (the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a game area 12a is formed in which the game balls fired from the launch device 15 roll. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail (specifically, an outer rail 41a (not shown) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 described later), and the outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of game nails (not shown) are punched into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 5 (a).

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13 a is set to a size that occupies the area of a part of the surface of the game board 12. The size of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be a size that occupies the area of the entire surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image, and an image for decoration are displayed. The player can visually recognize various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 through the game board 12.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a plasma display, a rear projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) ) A display device such as a display may be applied.

  Further, a spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back of the game board 12 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front of the liquid crystal display device 13 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). A space is formed which is a flow path of the game ball rolling on the game area 12a.

  The spacer 19 is formed of a light transmitting material. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, For example, one part may be formed with the material which has light transmittance, and may be formed with the material which does not have light transmittance. .

  The tray unit 14 is disposed below the gaming board 12. The tray unit 14 has an upper tray 21 and a lower tray 22 disposed below the upper tray 21. The upper tray 21 and the lower tray 22 are respectively provided with a payout opening 21a and a payout opening 22a for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls).

  When the predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the gaming balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a or the payout opening 22a, and the discharged gaming balls are stored in the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 22, respectively. In addition, the game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are fired by the launcher 15 to the game area 12 a.

  Further, the dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is mounted on the upper tray 21. Further, the jog dial 24 is rotatably attached to the effect button 23 on the periphery of the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined effect function performed using at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24, and when performing a predetermined effect, the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 An image prompting the operation of at least one of the effect button 23 and the jog dial 24 is displayed.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launcher 15 includes a launch handle 25 operable by the player and a panel 26 engaged with the lower right portion of the tray unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, on the back side of the panel 26, there is provided a solenoid actuator for controlling the firing operation of the game ball. Although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, a touch sensor is provided at the periphery of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25 to change the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. As a result, it is detected that the player grips the firing handle 25, and the firing of the gaming ball by the solenoid actuator is enabled.

  Then, when the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (clockwise when viewed from the player), the resistance value of the firing volume changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the firing handle 25. Power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 are sequentially fired, and the launched gaming balls are guided by the guide rails and discharged to the gaming area 12 a of the gaming board 12.

  Also, although not shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the side of the firing handle 25 is provided with a firing stop button. The firing stop button is a button provided to stop the firing of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. When the player depresses the release stop button, the release of the game ball is stopped even in a state in which the release handle 25 is held and turned.

  The dispensing unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are disposed on the back side of the base door 3. The game unit is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 22 from among the gaming balls supplied from the storage unit, based on the fulfillment of the payout conditions.

  The substrate unit 17 has various control substrates. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout / firing control circuit 300, etc. described later (see FIG. 8 described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is formed in a rectangular frame shape. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. An upper decoration unit 58 is provided in an upper area facing the speaker 11 on the front surface of the glass door 4. The upper decoration unit 58 is arranged to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4a of a size that exposes at least the game area 12a is formed in the area facing the game area 12a of the game board 12. A light transmitting protective glass 28 is attached to the opening 4a of the glass door 4, whereby the opening 4a is closed.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12. As shown in FIG. 2, at the left and right ends and the lower end of the opening 4 a of the glass door 4, electric decoration covers 58 </ b> A to 58 </ b> C are provided. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 59A-59C (refer FIG. 8) are provided in the rear surface of the electric decoration covers 58A-58C. The LEDs 59A to 59C are controlled to be lighted or blinked in conjunction with the effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, the effect buttons, the light emission of the illumination covers 58A and 58B, and the like.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (a). FIG. 5A is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the front surface of the game board 12 includes a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first start opening 44, a second start opening 45, and an ordinary electric role piece 46. Is provided. In the front of the game board 12, general winning openings 51 and 52, a first large winning opening 53, a second large winning opening 54, an out opening 55, and a plurality of gaming nails (not shown) are provided.

  Further, a bulging cover (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 54 on the front surface of the game board 12, and the bulging cover is bulging forward from the front surface of the game board 12. Hereinafter, the front of the game board 12 indicates the player side with respect to the game board 12, and the rear of the game board 12 indicates the opposite side of the game board 12 to the player side. Further, the right side and the left side with respect to the game board 12 represent the right side and the left side when the game board 12 is viewed from the front. Therefore, when the gaming board 12 is viewed from the rear, the right side of the gaming board 12 is on the left side in the drawing, and the left side of the gaming board 12 is on the right side.

  Furthermore, on the front of the game board 12, the special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol hold display device 63, the first special symbol hold display device 64, and the second special symbol on the lower right part thereof. A symbol hold display device 65 is provided (the reference numeral is omitted in FIG. 5 (a), see FIG. 8).

  In the present embodiment, a notification LED may be provided which lights up when the result of the stop display of the special symbol is "big hit", a round number display LED for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game, or the like may be provided.

[Various components of the game area]
The guide rail 41 extends in an arc shape so as to partition the game area 12a, and an outer rail 41a (shown by a broken line in FIG. 5A) (not shown) surrounding the opening 4a of the glass door 4 And an inner rail 41b which is disposed on the inner side (inner peripheral side) and extends in an arc shape.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are arranged to face each other near the left end of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby a launcher is provided between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c is formed which guides the game ball fired by the camera 15 to the top of the game area 12a.

  Further, at the end of the inner rail 41b located on the upper left side of the game area 12a, a ball discharge port 41d is formed by the end of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a opposed thereto. A ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the end of the inner rail 41b so as to close the ball outlet 41d.

  The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game balls discharged from the ball discharge opening 41d to the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge opening 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game balls discharged from the ball discharge opening 41d flow downward from the top of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails, the first starting opening 44, the second starting opening 45 and the like, and changes the traveling direction thereof From the bottom to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13 b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13 a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the gaming ball does not pass over the area overlapping the display area 13a in the gaming area 12a.

  The ball passing detector 43 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion of the first large winning opening 53 on the right side of the display area 13a as viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passage ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through. Further, by the game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol game, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started based on the result of the lottery.

  The first start opening 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start opening 45 is disposed below the first start opening 44. The first starting opening 44 and the second starting opening 45 are made of members capable of receiving game balls.

  Hereinafter, that the game ball enters or passes through the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 is referred to as "winning". Then, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls are paid out.

  In addition, by the game ball entering the first starting opening 44, the lottery of whether or not "big hit" and the lottery whether or not it is "small hit" is performed, based on the result of the lottery The variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, by the game ball entering the second starting opening 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether it is a "big hit", and variable display of the second special symbol is started based on the result of the lottery. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2, respectively.

  The first starting opening 44 is provided with a first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a winning game ball. In addition, the second starting opening 45 is provided with a second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 45. In addition, the game ball which has won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 passes through the recovery port (not shown) provided on the game board 12 and is conveyed to the recovery section (not shown) of the game ball .

  The ordinary motor-operated part 46 is provided at the second start port 45. The ordinary electric character 46 is a blade-like member that opens and closes in a forward and backward direction in the back and forth direction of the game board 1 and is an opening that enables the game ball to reach the second starting opening 45. It is configured to be switchable between the state and the closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball to the second starting opening 45. The ordinary motor-operated part 46 is driven to open and close by an ordinary-motor-part accessory solenoid 46a (see FIG. 8 described later).

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary motorized character 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of wing members is not a form that makes winning impossible, but a form that makes winning of the game ball difficult. It is also good. Also, the ordinary electric role 46 is not limited to one operating the wing-like member so as to open and close in the front and rear direction, for example, a so-called electric operation in which the starting opening is expanded by rotating in the left and right direction of the game board 1 It may be a tulip-shaped member or a tongue-like member which opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The general winning opening 51 is disposed near the lower left portion of the game area 12a as viewed from the player. The general winning opening 52 is disposed to the right of the ball passage detector 43, and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a as viewed from the player.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are made of members capable of receiving game balls. In the following, the game ball entering or passing through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52 is also referred to as "winning". When the game balls are won in the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out.

  In the general winning opening 51, a general winning ball sensor 51a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a winning game ball is provided. In addition, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball sensor 52a (see FIG. 8 described later) for detecting a game ball that has won in the general winning opening 52.

  The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are disposed below the ball passage detector 43 and to the right of the first starting opening 44 and the first starting opening 45. The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are disposed vertically along the flow path of the gaming ball, and the first large winning opening 53 is disposed above the second large winning opening 54.

  The first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 are both so-called attacking type opening and closing devices, and shutters 53a and 54a that can be opened and closed, and solenoid actuators that drive these shutters 53a and 54a (see below The first large winning opening solenoid 53b and the second large winning opening solenoid 54b) among eight.

  Each of the first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 receives the game ball when the corresponding shutter 53a, 54a is open (opened), and the shutter is closed (closed) At the time of the game ball is not accepted.

  Hereinafter, the game ball entering or passing through the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is also referred to as a "winning". When the game ball is won in the first large winning opening 53, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. On the other hand, when the game ball is won in the second big winning opening 54, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out.

  Further, a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 8 described later) for counting the number of winning game balls is provided in the first big winning opening 53. Further, the second large winning opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 5A and FIG. 8 described later) for counting the number of winning game balls.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 53 is formed on the front of the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large width dimension so that a plurality of gaming balls can be simultaneously won, The second large winning opening 54 is formed on a part of the upper end surface of the bulging cover (not shown) as an opening having a relatively small size so that one game ball can win one by one.

  The shutter 53a corresponding to the first large winning opening 53 opens and closes the first large winning opening 53 by opening and closing in a forward and backward posture in the front and rear direction of the gaming board 1 It is arranged to cover the first large winning opening 53 in the closed state. That is, the shutter 53a is changed to an open state in which the game ball can win the first big winning hole 53 and a closed state in which the game ball can not win or is difficult to win. It is driven by (see FIG. 8 described later).

  The shutter 54a corresponding to the second large winning opening 54 is to move the second large winning opening 54 to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the longitudinal direction of the gaming board 1, and the second large size in the closed state It is arranged to cover the winning opening 54. That is, the shutter 54a is changed to an open state in which the game ball can be won into the second big winning opening 54 and a closed state in which the game ball can not be won or difficult to be won. It is driven by (see FIG. 8 described later).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area through which the game ball detected by the count sensor 54c passes through the second large winning opening 54 inside the bulging cover 38B is provided. The ball passage of the gaming ball from the second big winning opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the bulging cover. After passing through one of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B, the gaming ball having won the second large winning opening 54 is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A count sensor 54c is disposed at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second big winning opening 54 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. A specific area sensor 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the passage of gaming balls in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A nonspecific area sensor 380B is disposed in the nonspecific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the nonspecific area 38B is detected by the nonspecific area sensor 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacing member 39 is changed by the displacing member solenoid 390 (refer to FIG. 8 described later) so that the gaming ball can be easily opened to the specific area 38A and the closing state impossible or difficult to pass. It is driven. When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, gaming balls that can not pass through the specific area 38A will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

  In the following, the game ball passing through the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V prize winning". In addition, the second large winning opening 54 provided with the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V attacker". In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V winning is successful, the transition to the probability variation gaming state is made. Therefore, the V prize may be referred to as "V certain". The displacement member 39 may be referred to as “V-bello”.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 5B may be used to realize the V winning. That is, a ball passage for guiding gaming balls downward is formed inside the second big winning opening 54, and at the lower end of the ball passage, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are adjacent to the left and right. Provide A count sensor 54c is disposed at a position where the ball enters from the second large winning opening 54. The specific area sensor 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area sensor 380A. A nonspecific area sensor 380B is disposed in the nonspecific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the nonspecific area 38B is detected by the nonspecific area sensor 380B. Then, in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B in the ball passage, a displacement member 39 which can be turned to the left and right is provided. In the displacement member 39, the posture shown by the solid line is the open posture after displacement, and the position shown by the phantom line is the normal closing posture.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state. When the displacement member 39 is in the open position shown by the solid line, the specific area 38A is in the open state, and the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is in the easy state. At this time, the displacement member 39 guides the gaming ball to a specific area 38A located on the right side of the ball passage. As a result, the gaming ball guided from the second big winning opening 54 to the ball passage becomes a V winning by passing through the specific area 38A. In addition, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed position shown by a virtual line, the specific area 38A is closed, making it impossible or difficult to win the game ball in the specific area 38A. The game ball is guided to the non-specific area 38B on the left side. As a result, the gaming balls guided from the second big winning opening 54 to the ball passage pass through the non-specific area 38B without passing through the specific area 38A. Even with such a configuration, a V prize can be realized. In addition, when the count sensor 54c detects the passage of the game ball, the prize ball is paid out, and based on the signals from the count sensor 54c, the specific area sensor 380A, and the non-specific area sensor 380B, the game ball from the second big winning opening 54 It may be determined whether or not the game ball has been discharged (whether or not the game ball remains in the second big winning opening 54).

  The out port 55 is provided at the bottom of the game area 12a. This out port 55 accepts a game ball which has not won any of the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the general winning ports 51, 52, the first large winning port 53 and the second large winning port 54. .

  When arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of this embodiment is arranged as shown in FIG. 5A, when the game ball is thrown into the right area of the game area 12a by the player (so-called right-handed) And the game ball is guided to the second starting opening 45 by a game nail or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first starting opening 44. In the present embodiment, it is easier for the player to receive the “big hit” lottery, which is advantageous for the player, than when the first start opening 44 has won the second start opening 45.

  Therefore, in the so-called "time saving game state" where winning to the second starting opening 45 is relatively easy, the possibility of winning to the first starting opening 44 (a game which is disadvantageous to the player) The possibility of becoming a state can be reduced.

  The bulging cover is provided below the first large winning opening 53, and the upper surface of the bulging cover is formed as an inclined surface. This inclined surface is inclined downward to the left from the upper right to the lower left as viewed from the player. The inclined surface guides the game ball flowing down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a to the second large winning opening 54, and the game ball rolling on the inclined surface collides with a rib or the like (not shown) Then, the speed of the gaming ball is reduced, and the gaming ball easily wins the second large winning opening 54 in which the shutter 54a is in the open state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), illumination covers 58E to 58H are provided around the display area 13a of the game board 12, and LEDs 59e to 59h are shown on the back surface of the illumination covers 58E to 58H (see FIG. 8) is provided. The electric decoration covers 58E to 58H perform effect display by lighting or blinking the LEDs 59e to 59h.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is made of liquid crystal, and performs various effect display in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image associated with (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 described later is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decoration The symbol is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, if the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display device 61 in the stop display is a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit"), the player is made to know that it is a "big hit". An effect image is displayed on the display area 13a.

  As an effect for making a player know that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged along a predetermined direction) Then, there is an effect such as displaying an image notifying "big hit".

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13, an effect image associated with the display content of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 described later is displayed. For example, in the display area 13a, holding information (for example, a holding symbol having the same number as the holding number) for displaying the holding number of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the holding ball of the special symbol, but the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62 described later is the predetermined aspect, the effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. You may further provide the function to make it display.

[Special symbol display device]
The special symbol display device 61 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays (variation display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols with symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display device 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs variation display of the special symbol (identification information), triggered by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the change display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the special symbol.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. Also, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is a specific mode (a mode of "big hit"), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state It shifts to the big hit game state which is a state.

  That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is a "big hit" that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 is open.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the special symbol display device 61, the second big winning opening 54 is in the open state.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of gaming balls have been won, or until a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Then, when the elapsed period of the open state of each big winning opening satisfies any one of these conditions, the big winning opening that was in the open state is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is in a state (opened state) in which the game ball can be easily received is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the big winning opening is closed.

  In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In addition, in the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol stopped and displayed is an aspect other than the specific aspect (an aspect of “loss”), the gaming state does not shift except in the case of winning the fall lottery.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61 and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and as a result, the gaming state is shifted or maintained.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 44 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning The display (hold ball) is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the held first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be suspended (so-called "number of suspended balls (number of balls for suspension)") is specified at a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the held second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be suspended (the number of suspended units) is specified at a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved variable designs for special symbols is eight in total.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one of the special symbols is executed preferentially to the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested rather than the holding ball of the first special symbol. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol are mixed, you may make it perform the fluctuation display of a special symbol in the held order.

[Normal symbol display device]
The normal symbol display device 62 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. And, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 as viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) . Then, in the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern configured by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is indicated as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 alternately turns on / off the two normal symbol display LEDs in response to the game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43, and performs the variation display of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the normal symbol.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "hit"), the normal motorized role 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "losing"), the normal motorized role 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric character 46 operates according to the result.

  When the gaming ball passes the ball passage detector 43 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the suspended normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of normal symbols to be suspended (that is, the "number of suspended units") is specified to be at most four times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The normal symbol holding display device 63 is a device for displaying the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol holding display device 63 is provided with a plurality of normal symbol holding display LEDs, and the normal symbol holding display device 63 By turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of pending variable display of normal symbols is displayed.

  Specifically, in the normal symbol hold display device 63, the normal symbol hold display LED is displayed according to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED is according to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol. Up to four lights up.

[First special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display device 64 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information on the variable display of the first special symbol being held (the holding ball of the first special symbol). In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, in the first special symbol hold display device 64, the first special symbol hold display LED is displayed according to the hold number of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first special symbol hold display A maximum of four lights up according to the number of pending variable displays of symbols.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display device 65 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device for displaying information on the variable display of the second special symbol held (the second special symbol holding ball), and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is plural. The second special symbol hold indicator LED of.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol hold display device 65, the second special symbol hold display LED is displayed according to the hold number of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second A maximum of four lights up according to the number of pending displays of the special symbols.

[CCD camera]
FIG. 6 and FIG. 7 are diagrams showing the range photographed by the CCD camera.

  FIG. 6 is a partially cutaway side view (schematic view) of the pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 6, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a CCD camera 1000 is disposed on the back side of the upper decoration unit 58. The CCD camera 1000 is attached to the upper rear of the glass door 4 and is located in front of the game board 12 when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3. Thus, the front of the game board 12 can be photographed using the CCD camera 1000.

  In FIGS. 6 and 7, the range photographed by the CCD camera 1000 is indicated by a thick line. FIG. 7 shows a state in which the range photographed by the CCD camera 1000 is viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 7, the CCD camera 1000 can shoot at a relatively wide angle of view θ (viewing angle), and most of the game board 12 is included in the shooting range. In particular, all the game areas 12a formed on the game board 12 are included in the shooting range. Therefore, the image taken by the CCD camera 1000 includes a game ball rolling on the game area 12a.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, configurations of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 70 that controls the game operation, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the rendering operation according to the progress of the game, and mainly the game ball. It has a payout / firing control circuit 300 that performs control relating to dispensing and firing.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory: also referred to as "RWM") 73. The main control circuit 70 also includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery process of the special symbol is performed at the time of winning of the first starting opening 44 or the second starting opening 45, but this processing is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 doubles as a means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process as to whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 functions as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables that the main CPU 71 needs for various processes.

  Although the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium. .

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, the main control circuit 70 is connected to the special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the normal symbol hold display device 63, the first special symbol hold display device 64, and the second special symbol hold display device 65. Be done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal motorized product solenoid 46a, a first large winning opening solenoid 53b and a second large winning opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric service combination solenoid 46 a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric combination 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first large winning opening solenoid 53b and the second large winning opening solenoid 54b, respectively, to make the first large winning opening 53 and the second large winning opening 54 open or closed. Do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors, and receives output signals of various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count sensors 53c and 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, passing ball sensor 43a, first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a and second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, The area sensor 380A, the non-specific area sensor 380B, the backup clear switch 121, and the like are connected.

  The count sensor 53c counts the gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54c counts the gaming balls that have won the second big winning opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball sensor 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 51. The general winning ball sensor 52a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 52.

  In addition, when the gaming ball passes the ball passage detector 43, the passage ball sensor 43a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70.

  The first starting hole winning ball sensor 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball has won the first starting hole 44. The second starting opening winning ball sensor 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 45.

  The specific area sensor 380A outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball passes the specific area 38A. The non-specific area sensor 380B outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the gaming ball passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  The backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / firing control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the game arcade manager or the like at the time of power failure or the like. .

  A payout / emission control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of winning balls which is the number of gaming balls to be paid out on the condition that a predetermined payout condition is established. The predetermined payout condition is that the game ball has won in the above-described various starting openings and various winning openings.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of winning balls determined as described above to the payout / emission control circuit 300 as a winning ball control command.

[Discharge and Launch Control Circuit]
The dispensing and firing control circuit 300 includes a microcomputer such as a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM. A payout device 170 is connected to the payout / firing control circuit 300, and the microcomputer of the payout / firing control circuit 300 controls, for example, a payout operation of gaming balls by the payout device 170.

  Further, to the payout / firing control circuit 300, a launching device 15 for launching a gaming ball, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150 are connected. A data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of lending balls, which is the number of gaming balls to be paid out on the condition that a predetermined payout condition is established. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 supplies power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the firing handle 25 is held by the player and turned clockwise. . Thus, the launcher 15 performs control to launch the gaming ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed as an incidental facility of a hall, for example, at the top of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting the card unit 150 to lend a game ball. When the card unit 150 receives a signal for requesting a game ball to be borrowed from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits to the payout / firing control circuit 300 a rental ball control signal including information on the determined number of rental balls.

  Such a payout / firing control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 170. Do. Thereby, the payout device 170 pays out the game ball.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub control circuit 200 controls the display in the liquid crystal display device 13, controls the sound generated from the speaker 11, controls the LEDs 59 A to 59 E, 59 e to 59 h according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. Control of rendering operation using various kinds of prizes etc.

  That is, based on the command from the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 can not supply a signal to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub control circuit 200 can transmit a signal to the main control circuit 70. May be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, an LED control circuit 207, and a drive control circuit 208. . A program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, an LED control circuit 207, and a drive control circuit 208 are connected to the sub CPU 201.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs for controlling the rendering operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, and various data tables. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with control means, for example, a hard disk device, CD-ROM and DVD-ROM, ROM cartridge Storage media may be applied.

  Also, each of the programs may be recorded on separate storage media. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance in a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after power on and may be recorded in the main RAM 73, the work RAM 203, or the like.

  The work RAM 203 functions as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores values of various flags and variables that the sub CPU 201 needs for various processes. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable and writable storage medium.

  The display control circuit 205 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image related to the effect. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as a VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. Further, the D / A converter converts image data (digital electrical signal) into an image signal (analog electrical signal).

  The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. In addition, the display control circuit 205 is an image such as decorative symbol image data, background image data, and effect image data indicating a decorative symbol (identification symbol for effect) based on effect specification information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. Temporarily store data in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The voice control circuit 206 has a sound source IC for controlling voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one audio data from the plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM based on the effect specification information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the read sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the predetermined sound signal to the AMP. The AMP also amplifies the audio signal to generate audio from the speaker 11.

  The LED control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, and an LED data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED lighting patterns are stored. The drive circuit selects one LED lighting / flashing pattern from the plurality of lighting / flashing patterns stored in the LED data ROM based on the effect designation information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201. Thereby, the LEDs 59 (59A to 59E, 59e to 59h) light or blink according to the lighting / flashing pattern.

  The drive control circuit 208 drives the effect driving motor 60 for operating various kinds of prizes based on the effect specifying information (message) supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  In addition, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to a presentation button switch 230 that detects that the presentation button 23 has been pressed and a jog dial switch 240 that detects the rotation direction and the amount of operation when the jog dial 24 has been rotated. Be done. The sub CPU 201 controls so that a predetermined effect display is performed according to a detection signal (input signal) from the effect button switch 230 or the jog dial switch 240.

  Also, a CCD camera 1000 is connected to the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 201 performs various processing on image data input by the CCD camera 1000.

  Such a sub control circuit 200 causes the liquid crystal display device 13 to display a predetermined effect image, and generates sound from the speaker 11, or performs effect display by lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h. Let In addition, the sub control circuit 200 analyzes an image (camera image) captured by the CCD camera 1000, and performs control according to the analysis result.

[Overview of animation request construction process]
The outline of the animation request construction process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an outline of an operation at the time of constructing an animation request (a generation operation of various requests).

  The sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) receives various commands from the main control circuit 70. Further, the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) receives data of an image (camera image) photographed by the CCD camera 1000. Then, based on the received command and data, the sub CPU 201 generates a request called an animation request including designation information of effect contents (not shown). Next, based on the generated animation request, the sub CPU 201 generates various requests (reproduction start request) such as a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, and a feature request.

  After that, the sub CPU 201 outputs each generated request to the control circuit (controller) of the corresponding rendering device. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 outputs the sound request and the lamp request to the voice / LED control circuits 206 and 207, outputs the drawing request to the display control circuit 205, and outputs the feature request to the drive control circuit 208. . Note that the audio control circuit 206 and the LED control circuit 207 may be separate units or may be configured by one control circuit.

  The sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207 control the sound reproduction operation by the speaker 11 based on the input sound request. Further, the voice / LED control circuits 206 and 207 control the operation of the light emission effect (LED animation) by the lamp (LED) group 59 based on the input lamp request. The display control circuit 205 controls the image display effect operation by the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the input drawing request. In addition, the drive control circuit 208 controls the rendering operation by the various prizes based on the generated prize request.

[Speaker drive control method]
Next, when the sound control request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the voice / LED control circuits 206, 207, the drive of the speaker 11 is executed by the voice / LED control circuits 206, 207. The contents of the control process will be described. FIG. 10A is a signal flow diagram at the time of speaker driving (sound reproduction).

  At the time of sound reproduction (output) of the speaker 11, first, a sound request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) in the sub control circuit 200 to the sound / LED control circuits 206 and 207. In the present embodiment, the effect control process of the sub CPU 201 (sub control main process shown in FIG. 26 described later) is performed at a predetermined FPS cycle, so transmission of a sound request to the audio / LED control circuits 206 and 207 Processing is also performed in a predetermined FPS cycle.

  Next, when a sound request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 206, 207, the audio / LED control circuit 206, 207 is an audio signal for setting an audio output pattern from the speaker 11 based on the sound request. Send (audio data) to the built-in relay board.

  Then, the built-in relay board amplifies the received audio signal and outputs it to the speaker 11 to drive the speaker 11. Thereby, the sound reproduction (rendering) operation by the speaker 11 is performed.

[Drive control method of lamp (LED)]
Next, when a lamp request is output from the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) to the audio / LED control circuits 206 and 207, the audio / LED control circuits 206 and 207 execute. The contents of various drive control processing of a plurality of LEDs will be described. In the lamp control method of the present embodiment described below, an LED is described as an example of a light emitting element, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present embodiment is applicable to any other light emitting element. The ramp control scheme can be applied as well. FIG. 10B is a signal flow diagram at the time of LED driving (lighting on / off).

  When the LED is driven (turned on / off), the host control circuit (sub CPU 201) in the sub control circuit 200 first outputs a lamp request (LED control request) to the audio / LED control circuits 206 and 207. In the present embodiment, since the effect control process (sub control main process shown in FIG. 26 described later) of the sub CPU 201 is performed at a predetermined FPS cycle, transmission of the lamp request to the audio / LED control circuits 206 and 207 Processing is also performed in a predetermined FPS cycle.

  Next, when a lamp request is input to the audio / LED control circuit 206, 207, the audio / LED control circuit 206, 207 is an LED for setting the lighting pattern (LED animation) of the LED based on the lamp request. Data (drive data) is transmitted to each LED driver in the LED group 59.

  Then, the LED driver turns on / off the connected LEDs 59 in a predetermined pattern based on the received LED data. Thereby, the rendering operation by the LED animation is executed. For example, the LED 59 is controlled to blink in a predetermined cycle (for example, every 12 milliseconds) as a rendering operation.

  In addition, the light emission aspect based on LED data is controlled by the signal (control signal) produced | generated based on LED data transmitted to LED59 from an LED driver. Specifically, depending on the electrical waveform parameters (voltage value, current value, duty ratio of pulse width, etc.) of the signal transmitted from the LED driver to the LED 59, the light emission mode such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and luminance of the LED 59 It is controlled.

  Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13.

[Random decision table]
FIG. 11 is a view showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. As shown in FIG. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is a "big hit", "small hit", and "lost" based on the hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball is won in the first start port 44. Is referred to in order to determine one of them by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second starting port) is determined by drawing either “big hit” or “lost” based on the hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball is won in the second start port 45 It will be referenced when you

  The winning determination random number value is a random number value for determining a lottery result performed triggered by the starting opening winning. More specifically, the random number value for hit determination is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the hit determination random number value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65,536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 44, one of “big hit”, “small hit” and “loss” is determined by lottery. Therefore, the hit random number determination table (at the time of the first start-up winning), "big hit", "small hit" for every value ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)") of the probability change flag And the range (width) of the random numbers for hitting determination in which the winning of each "losing" is determined, and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data", "small hitting determination value data", and "loss determination value" Data “) is defined. The definite change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "probable changing gaming state". If the gaming state is the "probable variation gaming state", the probable variation flag is "1", and if the "non-probability variation gaming state" is, the probable variation flag is "0".

  In the present embodiment, when the first start hole 44 is won, if the probability change flag is “0” and the hit determination random number value is any of “0” to “204”, “big hit” is won. , "Big hit determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  In addition, when the first start opening 44 winning a prize, the probability change flag is "0", and the random number for hitting determination is any of "205" to "409", "small hit" is won, and " The small hit judgment value data are determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  Furthermore, when the first start hole 44 is won, if the probability change flag is "0" and the hit determination random number value is neither "0" nor "409", "loss" is won and "loss determination" is made. Value data is determined.

  On the other hand, at the time of the first start opening 44 winning, if the probability change flag is "1" and the hit determination random number value is any one of "0" to "1092", "big hit" is won and "big hit" Determination value data is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≒ 1/60), which is higher than that when the probability change flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the first start opening 44 winning a prize, the probability change flag is “1”, and the random number for hitting determination is any of “1093” to “1297”, “small hit” is won, “ The small hit judgment value data are determined. That is, the winning probability of “small hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319), which is the same as when the probability change flag is “0”.

  Furthermore, when the first start hole 44 is won, if the probability change flag is "1" and the hit determination random number value is neither "0" nor "1297", "loss" is won and "loss determination" Value data is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 44, the jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is the “probable change gaming state”. Specifically, the jackpot probability when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 44 when the gaming state is the "probability gaming state" is about five times higher when the gaming state is not the "probability gaming state" .

  Similarly, when the second start opening 45 has won a prize, if the probability change flag is "0" and the hit determination random number value is any of "0" to "204", the "big hit" is won, and The jackpot determination value data is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≒ 1/319).

  In addition, when the second starting opening 45 winning a prize, the probability change flag is "0" and the hit judgment random number value is not any of "205" to "409", "loss" is won and "loss judgment" Value data is determined.

  On the other hand, when the 2nd starting opening 45 winning a prize, the probability change flag is “1” and the hit judgment random number value is any of “0” to “1092”, “big hit” is won, “big hit” Determination value data is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 1093/65536 (≒ 1/60), which is higher than that when the probability change flag is “0”.

  In addition, when the second starting opening 45 winning a prize, the probability change flag is “1” and the hit determination random number value is not “0” to “1092”, “loss” is won and “loss determination” Value data is determined.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 45, without winning in the "small hit", whether the gaming state at the time of winning is "probable change gaming state" or not Depending on whether the big hit probability fluctuates, the big hit probability when the gaming state is the “probable changing gaming state” is about five times higher than when it is not the “probable changing gaming state”.

[Symbol determination table]
FIG. 12 is a view showing a symbol determination table (a first starting opening, a second starting opening) stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. As shown in FIG. The symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) is based on the symbol random number value acquired when the game ball is won in the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45 and the above-mentioned determination value data. Is referred to in order to select "hit selection symbol command" and "design designation command" which determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol which is determined according to the hit type at the win win, and the "symbol designation command" designates a symbol to be displayed when the special symbol is stopped changing. Is a command to The symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

  According to the symbol determination table (first starting opening) of the present embodiment, 50/100 when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of “0” to “49”. “Z0” is selected as the hit selection symbol command with the probability of “zA1” as the symbol specification command. In the case where the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any of "50" to "99", "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. "ZA1" is selected as a symbol designation command. Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of "0" to "99", "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and it is selected as a symbol designation command. "ZA2" is selected. On the other hand, when the lost judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected, and "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command. It is selected.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting opening) of the present embodiment, 50 is obtained when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “49”. "Z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of / 100, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol specification command. In the case where the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any of "50" to "99", "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. "ZA5" is selected as a symbol designation command. On the other hand, when the lost judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA6" is selected as the symbol designation command. It is selected.

[Big hit type decision table]
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70. As shown in FIG. The big hit type determination table is referred to determine the type of big hit such as the number of rounds and the ease of the V winning according to the hit selection symbol command relating to the big hit. In the present embodiment, if the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the time saving flag is set to “1”, and the number of time saving is set as 100 times, for example. In addition, only when the player wins a V in the jackpot gaming state, the probability of variation is set as 124, for example. The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when it is "non time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0". The time reduction number is the variation number of the special symbol game in which the time reduction gaming state can be continued, and the probability variation number is the variation number of the special symbol game in which the probability variation gaming state can be continued. That is, if special symbol variation for a short time (100 times) is performed without winning a big hit in the short time gaming state, the short time gaming state ends and the non-short time gaming state is entered. If the special symbol change for the fixed number of times is performed without winning a big hit in the probability change gaming state, the probability change gaming state ends and shifts to the non-probability change gaming state.

  According to the big hit type determination table of this embodiment, when the hit selection symbol command is “z0”, the big hit where the number of rounds is “10” and the V winning is difficult is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is “z1”, a jackpot having a round number of “10” and a V winning easy is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", a big hit is decided that the number of rounds is "4" and the V winning is easy. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", a jackpot having a round number of "16" and which is easy to win a V prize is determined.

  Below, the various processes performed with the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown.

[Power-on process]
FIG. 14 shows a process at power on by the main CPU 71. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned ON, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. If the power failure detection signal is ON, the main CPU 71 determines that the power failure is detected, and repeats the process of step S12 until the power failure detection signal is turned OFF. If the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 determines that the power failure is detected, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 71 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process which waits until the sub control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs initialization processing on various devices incorporated in the CPU (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing to clear the backup contents of the main RAM 73 provided in the main CPU 71 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / firing control circuit 300. . If the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S23. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power failure detection flag is on. The power failure detection flag is a flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed in response to the occurrence of power failure. If the power failure detection flag is set to ON, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S18. If the power failure detection flag is set to off, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S23.

  In step S18, the main CPU 71 conducts a work area damage check on the main RAM 73 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S23.

  In step S20, the main CPU 71 initializes the work area requiring an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs notification setting for the high probability gaming state (probability changing gaming state) at the time of power failure recovery (step S21).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

  At step S23, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to clear the work area of the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 initializes the work area that requires an initial value at the time of RWM (main RAM) initialization (step S24).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs processing of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200 (step S25). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 15 shows a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 71. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 73 (step S31).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (step S32).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S35).

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs game information output processing of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / firing control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / firing control circuit 300, the hall computer .

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes processing for restoring the values of the saved registers (step S37). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 16 shows a switch input detection process by the main CPU 71. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 executes a starting opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning combination detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning a prize opening passage detection processing, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning on the general winning prize openings 51 and 52 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning on the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts ball passage detector passage detection processing (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random number value) of the normal symbol game is acquired according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the switch input detection process.

[Starting mouth winning detection process]
FIG. 17 shows the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 71. The start-up opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting hole winning ball sensor 44a (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first starting hole winning ball sensor 44a, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first starting hole winning ball sensor 44a, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S59.

  In step S52, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting payout information according to the first start hole winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start-up winnings (number of reserved first special symbols) is less than 4 (step S53). If the hold quantity is less than four, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S54. If the pending number is four, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S59.

  In step S54, the main CPU 71 executes a process of adding one to the number of first starting hole winnings held.

  Next, the main CPU 71 obtains a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and stores the random number values in the main RAM 73 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first start opening), the symbol determination table (first start opening), and the big hit type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Determines the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command according to the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol is determined based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the gaming state, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a pending number increase command of the first starting opening winning combination (step S58). The first start opening winning combination hold number increase command is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is to be increased by one, and a command (variation pattern designation command) etc. indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Together with the secondary control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole winning ball sensor 45a (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second starting hole winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In step S60, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting payout information according to the second start hole winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of reserved second starting hole wins (number of reserved second special symbols) is less than 4 (step S61). If the hold quantity is less than four, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S62. If the number of held pieces is four, the main CPU 71 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In step S62, the main CPU 71 executes a process of adding one to the number of holdings of the second starting hole winning.

  Next, the main CPU 71 obtains a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and stores the random number values in the main RAM 73 (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is also based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value, the hit random number determination table (second starting opening) and the symbol determination table (second The starting point opening) and the big hit type determination table are referred to, and the symbol specifying command and the hit selection symbol command and the like according to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S65). Also in this variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern relating to the second special symbol is determined based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the gaming state, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a pending number increase command of the second starting opening winning combination (step S66). The reserve number increase command of the second starting opening winning combination is a command indicating that the reserve number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating a variation pattern determined in the process of step S65 etc. Together with the secondary control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the starting hole winning detection process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 18 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 71. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process (step S81). In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 71 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts symbol display device control processing (step S85). In this process, main CPU 71 drives special symbol display device 61 and ordinary symbol display device 62 in accordance with the result of the special symbol control processing and the result of the ordinary symbol control processing stored in main RAM 73 in steps S83 and S84. A process of storing a control signal for making the main RAM 73 is performed. Thereby, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62, and the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 execute the special symbol or the ordinary symbol based on the received control signal. To change display and stop display.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 73.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes storage and gaming state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 71 generates storage / playing state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage / playing state data in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 19 shows special symbol control processing by the main CPU 71. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that numerical values ("00" to "08") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. The control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 advances the special symbol game by executing processing in accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 71 executes processing for loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines whether or not each process of step S92 to step S100 described later is to be executed based on the read value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes of step S92 to step S100 to be performed. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time or the like set for each process of step S92 to step S100. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, processing relating to another subroutine is performed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol storage check processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 71 checks the number of pending display of the variable display of the special symbol when the control status flag is the value ("00") indicating the special symbol storage check process, and the number of pending objects is not "0". In the case where there is a holding ball, the hit determination result obtained in the starting opening winning combination detection process, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S93) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the present process. The variation time of the special symbol to be set is set to the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning combination detection process has elapsed, it is set to execute a special symbol display time management process described later. On the other hand, when the number of held items is “0” (when there is no holding ball), the main CPU 71 executes a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. The special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol variation time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control symbol indicates the special symbol described later. A value ("02") indicating the time management process (step S94) is set, and a waiting time (e.g., 600 ms) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93, a special symbol display time management process described later is set to be executed. The special symbol variation time management process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol display time management processing (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process ("02"), and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93 has passed, the hit determination Determine whether the result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control status flag. The time corresponding to the big hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game end process (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set to execute a special symbol game end process described later. The special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts big hit start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed. In order to open the one large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54, the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 72. Further, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a control status flag to a value ("04") indicating a process for opening a special winning opening (step S96) to be described later, and an opening upper limit time of the special winning opening (for example, 30). Set second) to the special winning opening open time timer. That is, it is set by this process that a special winning opening open processing described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a special winning opening open process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 71 first opens the condition that the number of big winning opening winning counters is equal to or more than the predetermined number when the control status flag is a value ("04") indicating the big winning opening opening processing. It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening open time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). If one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("05") indicating the big winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97) described later in the control status flag, and sets the big winning opening residual ball monitoring time to the waiting time timer. Do. That is, by this processing, after the special winning opening internal residual ball monitoring time set in step S96 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening internal residual ball monitoring processing described later. An inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening open processing.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is a value ("05") indicating the residual ball monitoring process in the special winning opening, and the residual ball monitoring time in the special winning opening has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening (the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed, it is set so that the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening described later is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval processing in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval Set time) to the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, it is set so that the big hit end interval process described later is executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not greater than or equal to the maximum value of the special winning opening opening frequency, it executes waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has passed, the big winning opening is opened. The value of the number counter is updated so as to increase "1". Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening open processing to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 71 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening open time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned special winning opening open process (step S96) is set to be executed again. It is to be noted that the special winning opening open display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process.

  Further, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit end interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process ("07") and the special symbol game end process is executed when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed (" Set 08 ") in the control status flag. That is, this process is set to execute the special symbol game end process described later after the process of step S99. At this time, when the V winning in the big hit is successful, the main CPU 71 performs control to shift the gaming state to the probability changing gaming state, and when the V winning in the big hit fails, the gaming state is not Control to shift to the probability variation gaming state. When the big hit symbol is a symbol corresponding to "small hit", the main CPU 71 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol game end processing when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ends, or when the player loses a winning game (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol game end process ("08"), the main CPU 71 updates the memory indicating the number of held pieces (starting storage information) to decrease "1". Do. In addition, the main CPU 71 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the special symbol. Furthermore, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be performed after the process of step S100. When the special symbol game end process is ended, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to "00", "01", " Set “02” and “08” in this order. Thus, the main CPU 71 checks the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variation time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is the "big hit" or the "small hit", the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to "00", "01". , "02", "03" in order. Thus, the main CPU 71 checks the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variation time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the big hit start interval management process (step S95). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

  Furthermore, when transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. Thereby, the main CPU 71 executes the above-mentioned process of opening the special winning opening (step S96), the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S97) and the process of managing waiting time before the reopening of the special winning opening (step S98). It executes at a predetermined timing and executes a big hit game or a small hit game.

  In the big hit gaming state, when the termination condition of the big hit gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 71 executes the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S97), the big hit end interval processing (step S99) and the special symbol game ending processing (step S100). Is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state is ended.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 25 described later) in step S84 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 18 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above process.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 20 shows the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 71 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 73 by load processing (step S101).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating a special symbol storage check process (step S102). When determining that the control status flag is not "00", the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S103.

  At step S103, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of held second start opening winnings (variable display of second special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of held second starting hole wins is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S104. If it is determined that the number of pending positions of the second starting opening winning is "0", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S109.

  In step S104, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the number of pending second starting hole wins. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, It is determined whether or not there is a start-up memory of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in change is stored as start storage information. And, in the second special symbol starting memory area (1) ~ the second special symbol starting memory area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for 4 times being held Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for symbol determination or a symbol random number value acquired at the time of winning of the second start port 45, a determined variation pattern, etc. Be

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts special symbol storage transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning combination (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S106.

  In step S106, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts a big hit / small hit determination process (step S107). In this process, main CPU 71 is extracted when winning opening winning, and is a random number value for jackpot determination previously set in first special symbol start storage area (0) or second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired with reference to the hit random number judgment table (see FIG. 11) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, based on the acquired determination value data, the main CPU 71 determines (hit determination) which one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” has been won.

  Next, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S108). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S109, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of held first start opening winnings (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of held first starting hole wins is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S110. If the main CPU 71 determines that the number of held first starting hole wins is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S112.

  In step S110, the main CPU 71 subtracts “1” from the value of the first starting memory number corresponding to the number of first starting hole winnings held. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 71 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 73, It is determined whether or not there is a start-up memory of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed or suspended. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in change is stored as start storage information. And, in the first special symbol starting memory area (1) ~ the first special symbol starting memory area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for 4 times being held Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for symbol determination, a symbol random number value, a determined variation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning of the first start port 44. Be

  Next, a special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start hole winning (step S111). In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 71 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S106.

  In step S112, the main CPU 71 executes a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol display device 61, and determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the sub control circuit 200. Send demo display command to.

  In the present embodiment, after the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol display device 61, the demonstration screen is displayed when the first start opening 44 and the second start opening 45 do not have winnings over a predetermined time. Is displayed.

  Specifically, the main CPU 71 turns on the timer for transitioning to the demo when the waiting time timer (the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol) set in step S108 becomes 0 (see step S122 in FIG. 21). Set to That is, the main CPU 71 starts measuring the time elapsed after the variation of the special symbol stops. Then, in step S112, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the demonstration transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 3 minutes), and the value of the demonstration transition timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. If it is determined that there is a demo display command, a demonstration display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When the demonstration display command is received, the secondary control circuit 200 performs processing relating to the display of the demonstration screen.

  When the winning of the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 occurs before the value of the demo transition timer reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 71 turns off the demo transition timer. Specifically, when the main CPU 71 determines that the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44a in step S51 of FIG. 17, the main CPU 71 turns off the timer for demonstration transition. When the main CPU 71 determines that the game ball has been detected by the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a in step S59 in FIG. 17, the main CPU 71 turns off the demonstration transition timer. Thereby, the main CPU 71 ends the measurement of the time elapsed after the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this embodiment, after the above process is executed, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and then the predetermined time has passed without any winnings to the starting opening (the first starting opening 44 and the second starting opening 45). In the case, you will move to the demo screen. When the process of step S112 ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
The special symbol variation time management process performed in step S93 of FIG. 19 will be described using FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in step S121, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 71 determines that the value is “01” indicating the special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value is not the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is ended.

  In step S122, the main CPU 71 determines whether the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S123. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

  In step S123, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting (storing) a value (“02”) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag, and shifts the processing to step S124.

  In step S124, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. Then, the special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a symbol stop command so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to step S125.

  In step S125, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. When this process is ended, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 22 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 71. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating a special symbol display time management process (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been settled. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S133.

  At step S133, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". If the special symbol game is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S142. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S134.

  In step S134, the main CPU 71 further determines whether the special symbol game is a "small hit". If the special symbol game is determined to be "small hit", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not "small hit", that is, when the special symbol game is "off", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 71 executes time reduction / probability variation count subtraction processing. At this time, the process of subtracting the number of times of short / probable variation will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S136). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S137, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management processing in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting the big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73 (step S140). As a result, the sub control circuit 200 is sent a big hit start command or a small hit start command.

  Next, the main CPU 71 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 13) and sets the round number upper limit value (big winning opening open frequency upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 73. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The number-of-rounds display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S142, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S143.

  In step S143, the main CPU 71 executes processing for clearing the time saving state fluctuation number counter, and the time saving flag and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to step S138.

[Time reduction / probability variation count subtraction processing]
FIG. 23 shows the time reduction / probability variation count subtraction processing by the main CPU 71. The time reduction / probability variation count subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time saving state fluctuation number counter is 0 (step S151). The time saving state fluctuation number counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time shortening number (100 times as an example in this embodiment) becomes zero. If the value of the time saving state change number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S155. If the value of the time saving state change number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S152.

  In step S152, the main CPU 71 executes a process of subtracting one from the value of the time saving state fluctuation number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the time short state fluctuation number counter is 0 (step S153). If the value of the time saving state change number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S154. If the value of the time saving state change number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S155.

  In step S154, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to step S155.

  In step S155, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is zero. The probability variation state variation number counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set number of probability variations (124 in this embodiment as an example in this embodiment) becomes zero. If the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process. If the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S156.

  In step S156, the main CPU 71 executes a process of subtracting one from the value of the probability variation state fluctuation number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is 0 (step S157). If the value of the probability variation state fluctuation number counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S158. If the value of the probability variation state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process.

  In step S158, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting "0" as the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the time reduction / probability variation number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 24 shows a big hit end interval process by the main CPU 71. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 71 determines whether the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (step S161). If it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (S step 161: NO), the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval processing, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 71 clears the special winning opening open count display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening open count display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the round number at the time of the big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

  Next, the main CPU 71 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is periodically repeated a predetermined number of times during one round. Is a flag for indicating whether or not to open and close. If the first large winning opening 53 or the second large winning opening 54 is periodically opened and closed even in one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 71 transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing in the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). If the special symbol game is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to clear the value of the big hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning is successful during the big hit (step S168). If the V winning is successful, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S169. If the V prize winning has failed, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 71 executes processing to set "1" as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes processing for setting a prescribed number of probability variations (124 in the present embodiment as an example) in the probability variation state variation frequency counter (step S170).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a prescribed number of time-saving times (100 as an example in the present embodiment) to the time-shortening state variation frequency counter (step S172). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process.

  In step S174, the main CPU 71 conducts processing to clear the value of the small hit flag.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes the time reduction / probability variation count subtraction process described above (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the big hit end interval process.

[Normal symbol control process]
FIG. 25 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 71. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 25 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates the main RAM 73. Are stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 71 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the main CPU 71 performs processing for loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes of step S192 to step S196 described later, based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag. The normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of the processes of step S192 to step S196. Further, the main CPU 71 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time or the like set for each process of step S192 to step S196. Before this predetermined timing is reached, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol storage check processing (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol storage check processing ("00"), the main CPU 71 checks the number of pending variable display of normal symbols, and the pending number is "0". If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. Further, in this processing, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and the fluctuation time determined in the current processing Set to the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol has passed by the process of step S192, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal symbol variation time monitoring process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("01") indicating normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing, and the normal symbol control state flag is described later when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the waiting time after being set has elapsed, it is set such that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 conducts normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether the result of the determination is "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 executes the ordinary electric symbol opening setting process, and indicates the ordinary electric symbol opening process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag (step S195) Set "03"). That is, by this processing, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal motor-operated combination release processing is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 71 sets a value ("04") indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set such that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 71 determines in step S194 that the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 71 conducts the ordinary electric-powered combination object release processing (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the predetermined number of winnings have been made during the opening of the ordinary electric symbol 46 when the ordinary symbol control state flag is the value indicating the ordinary electric symbol opening process ("03") It is determined whether one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the normal motor-operated part 46 has passed (the normal electric-composition opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the blade-like member which is the normal motorized accessory 46. Then, the main CPU 71 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later to the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this processing, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal symbol game end processing is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 71 executes normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 71 decreases the data indicating the number of pending displays of the variable display of the normal symbol by “1” when the normal symbol control state flag is the value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end processing. Update to memory. Further, the main CPU 71 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform variable display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 executes sub control circuit main processing. The sub control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to have a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of start-up, and the power-off process is performed when the service pulse is not written (at time-out).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). In this process (animation request construction process), the sub CPU 201 generates an animation request including designation information of effect contents, and based on the animation request, various requests (drawing request, sound request) for operating various effect devices , Lamp request, and feature request). The effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes drawing control processing (step S206). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 205. The display control circuit 205 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes voice control processing (step S207). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a sound request to the voice control circuit 206. The voice control circuit 206 performs voice control for causing the speaker 11 to output voice based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes LED control processing (step S208). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a lamp request to the LED control circuit 207. The LED control circuit 207 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LEDs 59A to 59E and 59e to 59h based on a message (lamp request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a character control process (step S209). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a feature request to the drive control circuit 208. The drive control circuit 208 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor 60 related to the movable role based on the message (job request) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 ends, each process of step S202 to step S209 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 27 shows button input interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the timer for measurement. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230 (step S221). If there is an input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to the process of step S222. If there is no input signal from the effect button switch 230, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

  In step S222, the sub CPU 201 determines the operation state of the effect button 23 based on the input signal from the effect button switch 230, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operation means input processing]
FIG. 28 shows operation means input processing by the sub CPU 201. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described sub control circuit main process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 acquires the operation state based on the information indicating the operation state (step S231). The operation state includes the number of depressions and the like in the case of the effect button 23, and the rotation direction and the rotation angle, and further the rotation speed and the like in the jog dial 24. The rendering effect is determined according to the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the operation means input process.

Command analysis processing
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the command analysis processing performed in step S204 in the sub control main processing (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of command analysis processing in the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 acquires the reception command stored in the work RAM 203, and performs processing of analyzing the acquired reception command (step S241). At this time, if there is error information associated with the received command, the sub CPU 201 discards the received command.

  In addition, the sub CPU 201 identifies the type of the command in the analysis of the received command. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information of the specified command type in the work RAM 203. The command type is identified based on the information (preset value) stored in the command type portion (head byte area) of each command.

  If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no command type corresponding to the command received in the command type identification process, the sub CPU 201 discards the received command. In addition, the sub CPU 201 confirms the number of parameters included in the received command, and discards the received command if the number of parameters is different from the number of parameters corresponding to the specified command type.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing (command parameter check processing) to check the consistency of the received command (step S 242). In this process, the sub CPU 201 checks the contents of information (hereinafter referred to as a command parameter) in various parameters set for each command. Specifically, for example, the sub CPU 201 checks the always-zero area provided in a predetermined bit area in the parameter, checks the valid range of each data stored in the parameter, and combines the stored data. Do a check.

  The sub CPU 201 checks whether the command parameter included in the received command is normal or not in checking the consistency of the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the command parameter is normal (whether the command is valid or not). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the command parameter included in the received command is not normal, the sub CPU 201 discards the data of the received command.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the command parameter included in the received command is normal, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the command parameter (information such as a game status) on the game data. Further, the sub CPU 201 stores game data in which the command parameter is reflected in a predetermined area in the work RAM 203. Note that “game data” includes information on parameters in the command, etc., and is a data structure (collection area or a group of variables) that is referred to in various lottery processes performed by the sub CPU 201, animation request construction process, etc. Say). In the "game data", as described later, information of lottery results of various lottery processes (for example, effect patterns and the like) is also registered.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, the sub CPU 201 acquires various random number values for effect, and performs a lottery process related to the determination of the effect contents corresponding to the command type of the received command.

  For example, when the received command is a special symbol effect start command, the sub CPU 201 determines various effect patterns such as a variation pattern of the decorative symbol (sub variation pattern), an image effect pattern for displaying a background image, and the like. Also, for example, when the received command is the hold count increase command, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern related to the pre-reading effect.

  Further, in the process of step S243, the sub CPU 201 stores the lottery result of the sub lottery process (for example, information of the various effect patterns described above) in a predetermined area in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes demo transition control processing (step S244). In this process, when the received command is a demo display command (see step S112 in FIG. 20), the sub CPU 201 generates a drawing request (a request for displaying the demo screen on the liquid crystal display device 13).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of effect pattern selection (step S245). In this process, the sub CPU 201 selects a lottery result (rendering pattern) obtained by the sub lottery process of step S243. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the effect pattern (for example, the sub variation pattern or the effect pattern relating to the pre-read effect) obtained by the sub lottery process of step S 243 in the game data stored in the work RAM 203 Let Then, after the processing of step S245, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to step S205 of the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 26).

[Demonstration mode determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an effect mode determination process performed in step S205 in the sub control main process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect mode determination process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the sub CPU 201 executes camera image analysis processing (step S261). The camera image analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs video relation selection processing (step S262). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to information on game data stored in the work RAM 203, generates an animation request, and sets the animation request in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. By this processing, an animation request corresponding to the command reception and the analysis result of the camera image is generated. Next, the sub CPU 201 generates a drawing request (a control signal for controlling the liquid crystal display device 13) based on the animation request.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a lamp pattern (lamp request) selection process (step S263). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a lamp request (a control signal for controlling the LED 59).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sound pattern (sound request) selection process (step S 264). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a sound request (a control signal for controlling the speaker 11).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs other (ie, other than video relationship, lamp request, and sound request) selection processing (step S265). Note that this process includes, for example, a process of selecting a feature request for controlling presentation operations of various types of features.

  Then, after the processing of step S265, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect mode determination processing, and shifts the processing to step S206 of the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 26).

[Camera image analysis processing]
The camera image analysis process performed in step S261 of FIG. 30 will be described using FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a camera image analysis process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 201 receives image data obtained by shooting from the CCD camera 1000 (step S 281). In the present embodiment, an image (camera image) captured by the CCD camera 1000 is a moving image composed of a plurality of still images (frame images). That is, the camera video has a content that is formed by a large number of still images (frame images) continuing over time. Although the frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is not particularly limited, for example, a 250 fps (frames per second) CCD camera can be adopted. In the process of step S 281, the sub CPU 201 requests the control LSI of the CCD camera 1000 to transmit data (frame image data) corresponding to the frame image. In the CCD camera 1000, when there is frame image data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, frame image data for one frame can be stored in the buffer. When frame image data is stored in the buffer, the control LSI of the CCD camera 1000 transmits the frame image data to the sub control circuit 200. In this way, an image captured by the CCD camera 1000 is input to the sub control circuit 200 in frame units. When receiving the frame image data, the sub CPU 201 stores the received frame image data in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs projective transformation on the received frame image data. FIG. 32A (a) is a diagram showing an image before projective transformation is performed. FIG. 32A (b) shows an image after projective transformation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the CCD camera 1000 is located above the gaming board 12 to be photographed (see FIG. 6), and photographs the gaming board 12 from above. Due to this, the image taken by the CCD camera 1000 is distorted, and the image appears to extend downward (see FIG. 32A (a)). The distortion can be corrected by performing projective transformation based on a four-point marker on such an image (see FIG. 32A (b)).

  Further, the sub CPU 201 performs processing of emphasizing contrast by converting a value (pixel value) indicating gradation in each pixel to the frame image data (gradation conversion for each pixel) (step S282). In this process, the sub CPU 201 converts each pixel value based on a predetermined function indicating the correspondence between each pixel value before density conversion (density conversion) for each pixel and each pixel value after density conversion. Such gradation conversion can be performed, for example, by methods such as histogram expansion and histogram equalization. Thereby, the contrast of the frame image can be sharpened.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 performs filtering on the frame image data by gray-scale conversion (gray-scale conversion based on a region) including the pixels around each pixel (step S283). In this process, the sub CPU 201 converts each pixel value by using a predetermined spatial filter. As a spatial filter, for example, a smoothing filter can be used, and as a smoothing filter, an averaging filter (moving average filter) or a weighted averaging filter can be used. In the present embodiment, for example, it is desirable to use a Gaussian filter (Gauss filter) as the weighted averaging filter. In the Gaussian filter, the pixels in the area covered by the filter are weighted based on a function indicating a Gaussian distribution.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram illustrating an example of a moving average filter. FIG. 32B (a) shows a filter of 3 × 3 pixels, and FIG. 32B (b) shows a filter of 5 × 5 pixels. In the moving average filter, the pixel values in the area covered by the filter all have the same value (the average value of the pixel values in the area). FIG. 32C is a diagram illustrating an example of a weighted averaging filter. FIG. 32C (a) shows a filter of 3 × 3 pixels, and FIG. 32C (b) shows a filter of 5 × 5 pixels. In such a weighted averaging filter (Gaussian filter), the degree of weighting is larger for pixels closer to the filter origin (the target pixel) compared to the moving average filter, and using such a filter makes the filter smoother. Can perform natural smoothing. In the spatial filtering as described above, the value of one pixel in the image after filtering (output image) is not only the value of the pixel corresponding to the one pixel in the image before filtering (input image), As shown in FIG. 32B and FIG. 32C, it is calculated based on the values of pixels within a certain range including the surrounding pixels of the pixel. In addition, in the moving average filter and the weighted averaging filter, processing for each pixel may be performed on frame image data by applying one parameter (for example, a coefficient or the like) in which one value is set. Although possible, in particular, in the weighted averaging filter, the distance from the vertex portion of the frame image data (for example, the central portion of the frame image data) can be applied to the Gaussian function to obtain one value. Therefore, the value set for each pixel can be easily changed by changing the value passed to the Gaussian function. In addition, with Gaussian functions, even when calculation is performed not only in two dimensions but also in three dimensions, parameters can be obtained depending on how far they are from the vertex portion, so that weighting processing is common to each pixel, By changing the argument, it is possible to process each pixel, and the versatility of the process can be improved. The present invention is not limited to the example of applying one parameter in which one value is stored, but one parameter (for example, coefficient, array, structure, etc.) in which a plurality of values are stored, and a plurality of values are stored. A plurality of parameters (for example, coefficients, arrays, structures, etc.), a plurality of parameters (for example, coefficients, arrays, structures, etc.) in which one value is stored can be set variously. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the gray level variation caused by the noise included in the frame image.

  In the present embodiment, the image quality can be improved by processing the frame image data by using the above-described projective transformation, contrast enhancement, spatial filtering, and other image processing techniques. It is possible. The frame image data obtained as described above is stored in the work RAM 203 and used for the subsequent processing. The processes of step S282 and step S283 are positioned as pre-processing for making it easy to extract the position of the gaming ball in the frame image in the subsequent processing.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of extracting the difference between the preceding and succeeding frames (step S284). Hereinafter, the difference extraction between the preceding and succeeding frames will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38.

<Inter-frame difference extraction>
FIG. 33 is a conceptual diagram of difference extraction between preceding and succeeding frames. FIG. 34 is a view showing the game ball rolling on the game area. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining a difference image (1) from a frame image captured at time T1 and a frame image captured at time T2. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining a difference image (2) from a frame image captured at time T2 and a frame image captured at time T3. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the process of extracting the game ball at time T2 from the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). FIG. 38 shows a masking area.

  In FIG. 34, with a plurality of gaming balls rolling on the game area 12a, attention is paid to one gaming ball, and the position of the gaming ball at time T1 is shown as gaming ball 120a, and the game at time T2 The position of the ball is shown as a game ball 120b, and the position of the game ball at time T3 is shown as a game ball 120c. In addition, LED59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball 120a, the game ball 120b, and the game ball 120c.

  As shown in FIG. 33, at time T1, the effect LED is extinguished, the effect LED is on between time T1 and time T2, and then the state where the effect LED is on continues over time T4. Suppose.

  In FIGS. 35 to 37, in the entire range photographed by the CCD camera 1000, attention is focused on the area in which one gaming ball (game ball shown in FIG. 34) moves between time T1 and time T3. It shows. In these drawings, only a part of the imaging range is shown to make the explanation easy to understand, but in actuality, the following processing is collectively performed on the entire imaging range. The illustration is omitted except for the game ball and the effect LED.

  In the difference extraction between the preceding and following frames, first, as shown in FIG. 35, for the frame image (image of the first frame) taken at time T1 and the frame image (image of the second frame) taken at time T2. By performing differential processing, an image corresponding to the difference between the first frame image and the second frame image is created. The image indicates the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values in the first frame image and the second frame image. An image obtained in this manner is taken as a difference image (1). Note that a binary image obtained by performing threshold processing after performing differential processing may be used as the differential image (1). By converting pixel values above the threshold value into 1 (white pixels) and converting pixel values below the threshold value into 0 (black pixels) by binarization (or vice versa), the first frame image can be obtained. It is possible to extract a particularly large area of change from the second frame image. The difference image (1) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1, the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, and the LED 59 (effect LED).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 36, differential processing is performed on the frame image (image of the second frame) captured at time T2 and the frame image (image of the third frame) captured at time T3. Thus, an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image is created. The image indicates the absolute value of the difference between the pixel values in the second frame image and the third frame image. An image obtained in this manner is taken as a difference image (2). Note that a binary image obtained by performing threshold processing after performing differential processing may be used as the differential image (2). By converting pixel values above the threshold value into 1 (white pixels) and converting pixel values below the threshold value into 0 (black pixels) by binarization (or vice versa), the second frame image can be obtained. It is possible to extract a particularly large area of change from the third frame image. The difference image (2) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 and the game ball (game ball 120c) at time T3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 37, a process (AND process) of taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is extracted, and the image obtained in this way (an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2)) is time T2 Position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) in

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to detect the position of the gaming ball at time T2 while excluding the effects of lighting and extinguishing of the effect LED. Similarly, an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image (difference image (2)), and an image corresponding to the difference between the third frame image and the fourth frame image (difference By taking the logical product with the image (3), the position of the gaming ball at time T3 can be detected (see FIG. 33).

  Since the state in which the effect LED is on continues from time T2 to time T3, the difference image (2) does not include the position information of the LED 59 (effect LED) (see FIG. 36). Therefore, also by taking the difference between the difference image (2) and the AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), the position of the gaming ball at time T3 can be detected. Can. In this way, the position of the gaming ball can be detected more quickly, and various controls such as effects can be executed in real time according to the rolling (position change) of the gaming ball.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is 250 fps. That is, the acquisition interval of frame images by the CCD camera 1000 is 4 milliseconds per frame. On the other hand, the LED 59 (production LED) is controlled to blink at a cycle interval of 12 milliseconds (12 milliseconds of lighting and 12 milliseconds of extinction are repeated), and the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 is It is 1/3 of the blinking cycle interval of the LED. In the present embodiment, it is desirable that the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000 be 1/2 or less (or 1/3 or less, 1/4 or less, or the like) of the blinking cycle interval of the effect LED. Alternatively, the length of the shortest section among the on / off sections when the state of the effect LED switches to “off → on → off” or “on → off → on” is 2 of the image acquisition interval by the CCD camera 1000. It is desirable to control the effect LED so as to be twice or more (or three times or more, four times or more, etc.).

As a result, even when the state of the effect LED is switched from "off → on → off" or "on → off → on", three consecutive frame images (image of the first frame, image of the second frame) And any of the following (i) to (vi) can be acquired as an image of the third frame). The "off state" and the "lighting state" indicate the state of the effect LED included in each frame image. Even if it is any of following (i)-(vi), the position of a game ball can be detected by the method demonstrated above, eliminating the influence of lighting and extinguishing of presentation LED.
(I) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: unlit state, third frame image: lit state (ii) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: lit state, Image of the third frame: lighted state (iii) image of the first frame: lighted state, image of the second frame: lighted off state, image of the third frame: lighted off state (iv) image of the first frame: lighted state, 2 Image of the frame: lighted state, image of the third frame: turned off (v) Image of the first frame: image of the turned off, image of the second frame: turned off, image of the third frame: turned off (vi) 1 frame Eye image: Lighting state, 2nd frame image: Lighting state, 3rd frame image: Lighting state

  In the examples of FIGS. 34 to 37, although the case where the LED 59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball has been described, the same applies to the case where another object other than the effect LED is provided. The explanation is valid. The other objects include not only stationary objects but also operable objects (movable members). As such a movable member, a state (open state) enabling entry of the gaming ball to the winning opening (starting opening) and a state (closing state) rendering entry of the game ball impossible or difficult A variety of movable members disposed at predetermined positions on the game board can be mentioned, such as a character that can be switched (performs an opening and closing operation), a movable character for other effects, and the like. Specifically, an electric tulip-type character rotating in the lateral direction of the game board, a character operating a blade-like member, a character comprising a tongue-like member moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board, A rotating member etc. which can be rotated by using a direction perpendicular to the game board or a vertical direction as a rotating shaft can be mentioned. Such a movable member changes its appearance over time by performing an operation on the basis of a predetermined position on the game board (without changing the position), so that the change in the appearance also appears in the frame image become. However, the movable member can be removed from the image by the method described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, and the position of the game ball can be detected while eliminating the influence of such appearance change.

  In addition, an area in which a structure (for example, a launch path, a windmill, etc.) that is a factor causing erroneous detection of position information of the gaming ball, or an area where tracking of the gaming ball is not necessary (the gaming ball can not pass The region may be masked in advance (see FIG. 38), and the region may be excluded from image processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection and reduce the burden on image processing. In FIG. 38, the blackened area is a masking area. In FIG. 38, masking is applied to the guide path 41c (the area through which the game ball is released from the ball outlet 41d to the game area 12a) and the windmill 125 (see FIG. 34), which is the launch path. It shows the situation. Although FIG. 38 shows that a part (upper and lower slight portions) of the wind turbine 125 is not masked, the entire wind turbine 125 may be included in the masking region.

  The preceding and following frame difference extraction processing performed in step S284 in FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S284, the sub CPU 201 confirms the injection position (injection area) and the discharge position (discharge area) (step S285). The injection area and the discharge area will be described below with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

<Injection area and discharge area>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an injection area and a discharge area. FIG. 40 is a conceptual diagram for describing assignment of an ID to a gaming ball.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the ejection area and the ejection area are areas set as a fixed area in the game area 12a. In the figure, the injection area and the discharge area are shown as an area surrounded by a square. The ejection area is an area through which the game ball first passes when it is released from the ball outlet 41 d (see FIG. 5) to the game area 12 a. The discharge area is an area through which the game balls rolled on the game area 12a pass last when being discharged to the outside of the game area 12a. Specifically, the injection area is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the ball return prevention piece 42 (see FIG. 5). As discharge areas, five areas of discharge areas 1 to 5 are set. The discharge area 1 is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the first start port 44, the discharge area 2 is an area in the predetermined range near the second start port 45, and the discharge area 3 is a first large area. The discharge area 4 is an area in a predetermined range near the second large winning opening 54, and the discharge area 5 is a area in a predetermined range near the out opening 55. Area of

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls can roll simultaneously in the gaming area 12a, but identification information (ID) is assigned to each of the plurality of gaming balls. Positional information of the gaming balls is associated with the ID of each gaming ball, and it is individually managed where in the gaming area 12a a plurality of gaming balls exist.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the ID is an image in which different numbers, marks, and colors are assigned to the respective game balls. The ID is assigned immediately after the game balls are released from the ball discharge opening 41 d to the game area 12 a (when passing through the injection area). Specifically, in step S285 of FIG. 31, the sub CPU 201 performs the following processing.

  In the front-rear frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) described above, the positions of the gaming balls rolling on the gaming area 12a are detected. If there is a game ball belonging to the ejection area among the plurality of game balls (a plurality of game balls rolling the game area 12a) whose position is specified in this way, an ID is newly added to the game ball. assign. Although FIG. 40 shows that one game ball is completely contained in the ejection area, if at least a part of one game ball is included in the ejection area, the ID is set to the game ball. It will be assigned. In addition, even if one game ball belongs to the ejection area, when the ID is already assigned to the game ball, it is not necessary to assign the ID again, but in that case, the ID is again assigned. You may do it. The sub CPU 201 associates the position information of the gaming ball to which the ID is newly assigned with the new ID, and stores them in the work RAM 203.

  In addition, ID may be assigned to all the game balls that have passed through the ejection area, but an upper limit is set to the number of assignable IDs, and the number of already assigned IDs reaches the upper limit. If there is an ID, priority may be given to tracking of the gaming ball to which the ID has already been assigned (see FIG. 42), and the ID may not be assigned to the gaming ball that has passed the ejection area. On the other hand, priority is given to assignment of a new ID, and tracking of gaming balls to which an ID has already been assigned (for example, gaming balls with the longest elapsed time since passing through the ejection area) is ended and the ID is released, The ID may be assigned to the gaming ball that has newly passed through the ejection area.

  In addition, according to the game state, the game area is newly assigned a new ID by temporarily stopping ID assignment so that the number of game balls to be tracked does not increase excessively. It may be possible to exclude the game ball shot to the target from the tracking target. In addition, an area where the burden of tracking processing is heavy may be removed from the tracking target area as a masking area, and it may be determined whether or not a gaming ball is present in the gaming area other than the masking area. Furthermore, when the number of already assigned IDs is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (when the total number of gaming balls existing in the gaming region 12a is equal to or more than a certain number), N (for example, two) gaming balls pass through the ejection region. The ID may be allocated only to the game ball so that only the game ball that has first passed the ejection area among the N game balls is to be tracked. For example, in the big hit gaming state, gaming balls are more likely to be held in the gaming area 12a for a long time than in the normal gaming state. There is also an attacker having a structure in which the rolling speed of the gaming ball is slowed. In such a case, if all the game balls existing in the game area 12a are to be tracked, the processing load will increase. In this respect, if the above configuration is adopted, the processing load for tracking the game balls can be suppressed to a certain limit even when more game balls than usual are retained in the game area 12a. . On the other hand, even in such a case, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts (see FIG. 46) and the like by tracking a part of the game balls.

  On the other hand, among the plurality of game balls (the plurality of game balls rolling the game area 12a) whose positions are specified by the front and rear frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) Check if there is a game ball belonging to the club. Not only when one gaming ball is completely contained in the discharge area, but also when at least a part of one gaming ball is included in the discharge area, it is determined that the gaming ball belongs to the discharge area. When there is a game ball belonging to any of the discharge areas 1 to 5, the sub CPU 201 associates information with the ID of the game ball to indicate that the game ball belongs to the discharge area (pre-discharge flag), It is stored in the work RAM 203.

  Such injection area and discharge area can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the hall menu or various setting screens of the gaming machine, it is possible to set one area selected from among a plurality of predetermined areas as an injection area or a discharge area. Further, any area in the game board may be set as an injection area or a discharge area by using a touch panel or the like. Of course, it may be automatically set in advance according to the model. The discharge area may be set in the vicinity of the general winning opening in addition to the vicinity of the starting opening and the big winning opening. When the discharge area is set in the vicinity of the winning opening, the discharging area may be set in a wider range as the winning opening is larger. The masking area (see FIG. 38) can be set similarly to the injection area and the discharge area.

  The injection / discharge position confirmation process performed in step S285 of FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S285, the sub CPU 201 executes gaming medium tracking processing (step S286). The game medium tracking process will be described below with reference to FIGS.

<Game media tracking process>
FIG. 41 (a) shows the position of the gaming ball at time T2. FIG. 41 (b) shows the position of the gaming ball at time T3. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a search range based on the position of the gaming ball at time T2.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the frame image captured at time T1 (the first frame image), the frame image captured at time T2 (the second frame image), and the time T3. The position of the gaming ball at time T2 is specified based on the photographed frame image (the image of the third frame).

  A large number of game balls may exist simultaneously in the game area 12a, but in order to make the explanation easy to understand, in FIG. 41 (a), two game balls are focused on, and these two game balls at time T2 Indicates the position of. The two game balls are assigned IDs ID (1) and ID (2), respectively.

  Also, a frame image (image of the second frame) taken at time T2, a frame image (image of the third frame) taken at time T3, and a frame image (image of the fourth frame) taken at time T4 And the position of the gaming ball at time T3 is specified.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 41 (b) focuses on two gaming balls and shows the positions of these two gaming balls at time T3. In the drawing, the position of one game ball is shown as a game ball 120d, and the position of the other game ball is shown as a game ball 120e.

  In the example of FIG. 41, the game ball indicated by ID (1) moves to the position indicated by game ball 120 d between time T2 and time T3, and the game ball indicated by ID (2) is time T2 Between time T3 and time T3, it is considered to have moved to the position shown as gaming ball 120e. However, in a state in which a large number of game balls are rolling on the game area 12a simultaneously, the game ball 120d is identified as the game ball indicated by ID (1), and the game ball 120e is indicated by ID (2). Identifying as a game ball (accurately grasping that the game ball 120d is identical to the game ball indicated by ID (1) and the game ball 120e is identical to the game ball indicated by ID (2) Is not easy in practice (the game ball 120e is identical to the game ball indicated by ID (1), and the possibility that the game ball 120d is identical to the game ball indicated by ID (2)) Not easy to eliminate).

  The game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 42 is a process for correlating the game ball at time T2 with the game ball at time T3. That is, the game medium tracking process is a process of connecting the same game balls with each other for a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2 and a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T3. For example, it is a process of tracking to which position the gaming ball that was present at a certain position at time T2 has moved between time T2 and time T3.

  As a premise, it is assumed that the position of the gaming ball at time T2 and the position of the gaming ball at time T3 are specified by the above-described front and rear frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31). An image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T2 is referred to as a ball position image (T2), and an image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T3 is referred to as a ball position image (T3).

  The sphere position image (T2) is an AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), and the sphere position image (T3) is a difference image (2) and a difference image (3) And an AND image. The ball position image (T2) includes position information of a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2, and each position information corresponds to the ID assigned to the game ball existing at the position. Then, it is stored in the work RAM 203. The ball position image (T3) includes position information of a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T3, and each position information is stored in the work RAM 203. At the time before the game medium tracking process is performed, each position information of the game balls included in the ball position image (T3) is not associated with the ID of the game ball. By performing the game medium tracking process, each position information of the game ball included in the ball position image (T3) is associated with the ID of the game ball. The details will be described below.

  First, the sub CPU 201 acquires an image of a target frame (step S301). The target frame indicates a sphere position image (T2) and a sphere position image (T3). The sub CPU 201 reads, from the work RAM 203, data indicating the ball position image (T2) and data indicating the ball position image (T3).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines one ID (for example, ID (1)) of all the IDs currently to be managed as a processing target, and sets it as the previous frame (ball position image (T2)). Among the plurality of game balls included, a search range based on the position of the game ball associated with the one ID is set (step S302).

  As described above, the IDs of the game balls are associated with the plurality of game balls (the plurality of game balls present in the game area 12a at time T2) included in the ball position image (T2). A search range is set for each of the plurality of game balls (a plurality of IDs). The search range is an area (time corresponding to one frame) in which there is a high possibility that gaming balls existing at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain time) will exist at time T3 (after a time corresponding to one frame has elapsed). The game ball is a movable range) and is preset according to each position in the ball position image.

  For example, for the game ball indicated by ID (1), a search range as shown in FIG. 43 is set in the vicinity area of the position of the game ball of ID (1). The same applies to gaming balls to which other IDs are assigned, and the search range is set by the number of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T2). Here, the process of step S302 to step S314 is looped, and for example, after the process of step S302 to step S314 is performed on ID (1), the process of step S302 to step S314 is performed on ID (2). The process proceeds to step S302 to step S314 for the ID (3), and the subroutine proceeds. Note that, instead of looping each step, processing may be performed collectively for all the IDs for each step.

  Such a search range may be set in advance based on values (for example, rollable speed, acceleration, etc.) related to the rolling of the gaming ball calculated by experiments etc. It may be set by separately performing a process of predicting the rollable range of the gaming ball based on that.

  In the process of step S303, the sub CPU 201 sets the positions of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) and one game ball at time T2 (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) It is determined whether or not there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) by comparing the search range with the search range.

  If it is determined that there are gaming balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the current detection position (step S304). . The "mark" is to associate the position information of the game ball with the ID. In this process, the sub-CPU 201 determines the position information of the gaming ball determined to be within the search range and the ID of the gaming ball as a reference of the search range, that is, the ID currently being processed (for example, The work RAM 203 stores the ID (1)) in association with each other.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets “0” to the re-search number counter (step S305). The value of the re-search number counter is a value that is added each time the search range is reset (see step S312), and is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one gaming ball. In the process of step S305, the sub CPU 201 sets “0” to the re-search number counter associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed.

  Although not shown, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag on in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)). The search end flag is a flag indicating that the search process (the process of step S303) on the ID currently being processed is not to be performed any more. This subroutine ends on condition that the search end flag is set to on in association with all the IDs (see step S315).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the erasure flag to off (step S306). The disappearance flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that there are no game balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) in the search process (the process of step S303). Yes (see step S310), and is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one gaming ball. In the process of step S306, the sub CPU 201 sets the erasure flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed to off. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S315.

  In step S303, if it is determined that there are no game balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3), is the sub CPU 201 lost within the discharge area? It is determined whether or not it is (step S307). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 controls the game ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed as shown in FIG. 39 at time T2 (one of discharge areas 1 to 5). It is judged whether it belonged to Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above-described immediately before discharge flag is set in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed.

  If it is determined that the gaming ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed belongs to the discharge area at time T2, the sub CPU 201 releases the ID (step S308). That is, the sub CPU 201 excludes the ID from management targets. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S305.

  If it is determined in step S307 that the gaming ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed does not belong to the discharge area at time T2, the sub CPU 201 determines the ID (for example, the ID (for example, ID (1)). It is determined whether the disappearance flag associated with 1) is set to ON (step S309).

  If it is determined that the erasure flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) is not set on, the sub CPU 201 determines that the erasure flag is associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) Is set on (step S310).

  If it is determined in step S309 that the erasure flag associated with the ID (for example, ID (1)) is set to ON, or after the process of step S310 is performed, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ID For example, for ID (1)), a search range different from the search range set previously is set again (step S311). Thereby, based on the reset search range, the search process (the process of step S303) for the ID (for example, ID (1)) is performed again.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the re-search number counter (step S312). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the re-search number counter stored in the work RAM 203 as the new re-search number counter value in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the re-search number counter is larger than 50 (step S313). If it is determined that the value of the re-search number counter is greater than 50, the sub CPU 201 ends the search for the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed (step S314). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag on in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  If it is determined in step S313 that the value of the re-search number counter is 50 or less, or after the process of step S314 or step S306 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the search for all IDs is completed. (Step S315). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the search end flag is set to ON in association with the IDs of all the game balls included in the ball position image (T2).

  If it is determined that the search end flag is not set to ON for the ID of at least one gaming ball, the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S302. As a result, the process of steps S302 to S314 is performed on the ID for which the search is not completed (the ID for which the process of step S305 or step S314 is not completed).

  Specifically, for the ID to be processed for the first time, search processing (processing of step S303) is performed based on a predetermined search range. On the other hand, the search process (the process of step S303) is performed on the ID that has already been the process target, based on the search range reset in step S311.

  If it is determined in step S315 that the search end flag is set to ON in association with the IDs of all the game balls included in the ball position image (T2), the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The gaming medium tracking process performed in step S286 in FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S286, the sub CPU 201 executes a process related to ID maintenance of overlapping and discrete (step S287). In the following, ID maintenance of overlapping and discrete will be described using FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG.

<ID maintenance of overlapping discrete>
FIG. 44 (a) shows the position of the gaming ball at time T2. FIG. 44 (b) shows the position of the gaming ball at time T3. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a search range based on the position of the gaming ball at time T2.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (a), FIG. 44 (a) focuses on the two gaming balls in the image (ball position image (T2)) showing the position of the gaming ball at time T2, and these at time T2 The position of two game balls is shown. The two game balls are assigned IDs ID (1) and ID (2), respectively.

  Similar to FIG. 41 (b), in FIG. 44 (b), focusing on the two gaming balls in the image (ball position image (T3)) showing the position of the gaming ball at time T3, these at time T3 The position of two game balls is shown. In the drawing, the position of one game ball is shown as a game ball 120d, and the position of the other game ball is shown as a game ball 120e. In addition, the position of the gaming ball of ID (1) and the position of the gaming ball of ID (2) at time T2 are also indicated by virtual lines.

  FIG. 44 (b) shows that the game ball 120d and the game ball 120e overlap. In a state in which a plurality of gaming balls are rolling on the game area 12a at the same time, in this way, the gaming balls are on the image, depending on the positional relationship between the gaming balls and the positional relationship between the gaming balls and the CCD camera 1000. It may overlap.

  In such a case, as shown in FIG. 45, within the search range (see step S302 of FIG. 42) set for one gaming ball at time T2 (in this example, the gaming ball of ID (1)) A situation may occur where two or more gaming balls belong at time T3. In such a situation, of the two or more game balls belonging to the search range, any game ball is the reference of the search range, the game ball of the ID (in the example of FIG. 45, the game ball of ID (1)) It can not be determined immediately.

  In such a case, the mode of overlapping of gaming balls in the ball position image (T3), the position of the gaming ball before time T2 (for example, the ball position image one frame before (T1)), from time T3 Also refer to the position of the gaming ball after the game (for example, the ball position image (T4) after one frame) and the like. Thereby, in consideration of the existing position, moving direction, speed, and the like in the game area 12a of the overlapping game balls, among the two or more game balls belonging to the search range, it becomes the reference of the search range. The ID (in the example of FIG. 45, ID (1)) is assigned to a game ball having a high probability of being a game ball of ID (in the example of FIG. 45, a game ball of ID (1)). In this manner, even when two or more gaming balls belong to the search range, the ID can be maintained.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), when two or more gaming balls overlap at time T3 (ball position image (T3)), a search range (shown in the figure) based on the position of the gaming ball at time T3. When tracking game balls at time T4 (ball position image (T4)) (when performing game medium tracking processing shown in FIG. 42) by setting the two or more game balls (eg, FIG. 44) The search ranges set for the game ball 120d and the game ball 120e) shown in (b) may overlap in a wide range. Then, a situation may occur in which two or more gaming balls belong to these search ranges at time T4 (ball position image (T4)). In such a situation, as described above, the mode of overlapping of gaming balls in the ball position image (T3), the position of the gaming ball before time T3 (for example, the ball position image one frame before (T2)), The ID can be maintained by referring to the position of the game ball after time T4 (for example, the ball position image (T5) after one frame).

  In addition, although the case where game balls overlap on a picture was explained above, the same explanation fundamentally applies, also when the game balls approach (contact).

  In the above, the process concerning ID maintenance of overlap discrete performed in step S287 of FIG. 31 has been described using FIG. 44 and FIG. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S287, the sub CPU 201 executes a process related to clogging / loss detection (step S288). Hereinafter, the detection of clogging and disappearance will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Clogged / lost detection>
FIG. 46 is a view showing how a ball jam occurs on a game board by a plurality of game balls. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing a process related to clogging / disappearance detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 48A is a diagram for describing the vanishing point and the vanishing detection area. FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing how ball clogging occurs. FIG. 48C is a view for explaining an area of overlap between the game balls and overlap detection.

  FIG. 46 shows that eight game balls 120f to 120m are sandwiched and accumulated between nails. The eight game balls 120f to 120m are sandwiched between the game board 12 and the protective glass 28 (see FIG. 4), which causes a ball jam. A so-called "grape" (a bunch of grapes) is formed by these eight game balls 120f to 120m.

  In pachinko gaming, such "grapes" are purposely created by using a magnet, and by using the "grapes", a game ball is guided to a winning opening (starting opening) to obtain an out-roll. There are cases where fraudulent acts to be attempted (so-called "Vigogot") are performed. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect that "grapes" have been generated, and it is possible to prevent "grapes" from being performed. Hereinafter, a method for detecting the occurrence of “grape” (ball clogging) will be described.

In the present embodiment, when at least one of the following conditions (i) and (ii) is satisfied, it is determined that ball clogging has occurred.
(I) The phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the gaming ball does not change over a predetermined time occurs within a predetermined area a predetermined number of times or more (ii) the position of one gaming ball and the position of another gaming ball Overlap on the image (overlap) occurs within a predetermined area a predetermined number or more

  Hereinafter, specific processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a game ball which has not moved for a predetermined time or more (is staying at the same position) (step S351). In this processing, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information (see step S 304 in FIG. 42) associated with the work RAM 203 for all the IDs currently managed, and the position information for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of consecutive times). It is determined whether or not they are the same across the frame images of

  If it is determined that there is a game ball which has not moved for a predetermined time or longer (is in the same position), the sub CPU 201 releases the ID of the game ball (step S352). When one game ball is parked at the same position, the position information of the game ball is not included in the difference image when the difference process (see FIG. 36) is executed, and thus the game ball is further traced. It is difficult to do. Therefore, in that case, the sub CPU 201 removes the ID of the game ball from the management target. The processes of step S352 and the next step S353 may be performed, for example, after the process of step S314 of FIG. 42 and before the process of step S315.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a vanishing point (step S353). In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the work RAM 203 to separately store the position information associated with the ID removed from the management target in step S352. The vanishing point corresponds to the position information, and indicates the stopping position of the gaming ball which has not moved for a predetermined time or more. FIG. 48 (a) shows that when the gaming ball of ID (1) is stopped at a fixed position for a fixed time or more, the position is set as a vanishing point. The setting of the vanishing point is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S 351 that there is no gaming ball which has not moved for a predetermined time or after executing the processing of step S 353, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, three) or more vanishing points are set It is determined whether or not it is (step S354).

  If it is determined that the loss point is set to a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, the sub CPU 201 sets an area for loss detection (step S355). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a predetermined range, which is set on the basis of the vanishing point set first among the vanishing points of the predetermined number or more, as a vanishing detection area. FIG. 48 (a) shows that, when the gaming ball of ID (1) is stopped at a fixed position for a fixed time or more, an area of disappearance detection is set based on the position. The area of loss detection is set as a fixed range including the reference loss point.

  Specifically, the loss detection area is preset according to each position in the ball position image, and a table indicating the correspondence between position information in the ball position image and the loss detection area is stored in the program ROM 202. It is done. In step S355, the sub CPU 201 refers to the table stored in the program ROM 202, and based on the position information corresponding to the reference vanishing point (the vanishing point set first), An area set accordingly is determined as an area for disappearance detection.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, three) or more vanishing points exist in the vanishing detection area set in step S355 (step S356). In this process, if at least a part of the vanishing point belongs to the vanishing detection area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the vanishing point is present in the vanishing detection area. If it is determined that there are less than a predetermined number (for example, three) of loss points in the loss detection area, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined number (for example, three) or more of the vanishing points exist in the vanishing detection area, the sub CPU 201 performs the ball jamming determination (step S357). That a predetermined number or more of vanishing points exist in the vanishing detection area means that a phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the gaming ball does not change over a predetermined time in the vanishing detection area has occurred a predetermined number of times or more. (Refer to the condition (i) above). In FIG. 48 (b), in addition to the gaming ball of ID (1), the gaming ball of ID (2) and the gaming ball of ID (3) are each for a predetermined time in the region of disappearance detection shown in FIG. 48 (a). It shows that it is determined that the ball is clogged by staying at the station. The ball clogging point indicates the approximate position where the ball clogging occurred.

  In the process of step S 357, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 13 to display an image notifying that the ball clogging has occurred, or causes the speaker 11 to output a sound notifying that the ball clogging has occurred. . Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam occurrence signal indicating that a ball jam has occurred, to a hall computer that manages a pachinko gaming machine in a hall (game hall). The ball clogging occurrence signal may include information indicating a ball clogging point. After executing the processing of step S357, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S354 that the lost points are set less than a predetermined number (for example, three), the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a game ball overlapping another game ball (step S358). Although it has been described that the present subroutine is ended when it is determined in step S356 that there are fewer than a predetermined number (for example, three) of loss points in the loss detection area, the process of step S358 is also performed in this case. It is possible to move to In the process of step S358, the sub CPU 201 obtains the ball position image (for example, the ball position image (T3) shown in FIG. 44 (b)) obtained by the above-described inter-frame difference extraction process (see FIGS. 33 to 37). At the above, it is determined whether or not overlapping of the game balls has occurred.

  In FIG. 48C, focusing on three gaming balls in the image (ball position image (T3)) indicating the position of the gaming ball at time T3, the positions of these three gaming balls at time T3 are shown. ing. ID's (1), ID's (2), and IDs's (3) are assigned to the three game balls, respectively, by the above-described game medium tracking process (see step S304 in FIG. 42). On the image, the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2) overlap, and the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (3) overlap. In the figure, the overlapping part of the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2) and the overlapping part of the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (3) are shaded. It shows by. In the process of step S358, the sub CPU 201 determines whether such an overlap has occurred (whether an overlap portion exists on the ball position image).

  If it is determined that the overlap has not occurred, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that an overlap has occurred, the sub CPU 201 sets an area for overlap detection (step S359). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is the first game ball to which an ID is assigned among the game balls having an overlapping portion with another game ball (the portion shown by hatching in FIG. 48C). A predetermined range set on the basis of the position of the gaming ball that has passed through the ejection area is set as the overlap detection area. FIG. 48 (c) shows that the area of overlap detection is set based on the position of the game ball of ID (1). The area of overlap detection is set as a certain range including the reference game ball.

  Specifically, the overlap detection area is preset according to each position in the ball position image, and a table indicating the correspondence between position information in the ball position image and the overlap detection area is stored in the program ROM 202. It is done. In step S359, the sub CPU 201 refers to the table stored in the program ROM 202, and based on the position information of the reference game ball (the game ball assigned the first ID), the position information is An area set accordingly is determined as an area for overlap detection.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, five) or more of overlaps occur in the area of overlap detection set in step S359 (step S360). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of overlaps (the above overlapping portions) present in the overlap detection area is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, five). The sub CPU 201 determines that the overlap (overlap part) exists in the overlap detection area if at least a part of the overlap (overlap part) belongs to the overlap detection area. If it is determined that the number of overlaps (overlapping portions) present in the overlap detection area is less than a predetermined number (for example, five), the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of overlaps (overlapping portions) present in the overlap detection area is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, five), the sub CPU 201 performs ball clogging determination (step S361). The fact that the number of overlapping portions present in the overlap detection area is a predetermined number or more means that “the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap in the image in the area of overlap detection ( “Overlap” means that “a predetermined number or more of occurrences occur” (see the condition (ii) above).

  For example, in addition to the game balls of ID (1) to ID (3) shown in FIG. 48 (c), game balls of ID (4) to ID (6) not shown exist in the overlap detection area, ID (1) ) And the game ball of ID (4) overlap, the game ball of ID (2) and the game ball of ID (5) overlap, and the game ball of ID (5) and ID (6) In the case where the game balls of (1) overlap with each other and all the overlaps (overlapping portions) exist in the area of overlap detection, five overlaps exist in the area of overlap detection. In this case, if the “predetermined number” = 5, the condition (ii) is satisfied, and it is determined that the ball is clogged.

  The sub CPU 201 performs the same processing as step S357 in the determination of ball clogging in step S361. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The process related to the clogging / disappearance detection performed in step S 288 in FIG. 31 has been described above with reference to FIGS. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S288, the sub CPU 201 ends the camera image analysis process shown in FIG.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment copes with the difference between the frame image (image of the first frame) taken at time T1 and the frame image (image of the second frame) taken at time T2. Difference image (1) and a difference image corresponding to a difference between a frame image (image of the second frame) taken at time T2 and a frame image (image of the third frame) taken at time T3 ) Is created. Here, between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2), an environmental change occurs in the gaming area 12a in addition to a change in the position of the gaming ball In this case, the environmental change will appear in the difference image (1). Similarly, between the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3), an environmental change occurs in the gaming area 12a in addition to a change in the position of the gaming ball In this case, the environmental change will appear in the difference image (2). However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the appearance of such environmental change in the difference image is removed by taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). It is possible. Thereby, even when such an environmental change (for example, a change in extraneous light) occurs, the position of the gaming ball is grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the environmental change. be able to.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, each frame image may include effect LEDs in the following states (i) to (iv).
(I) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: unlit state, third frame image: lit state (ii) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: lit state, Image of the third frame: lighted state (iii) image of the first frame: lighted state, image of the second frame: lighted off state, image of the third frame: lighted off state (iv) image of the first frame: lighted state, 2 Frame image: Lighted, 3rd frame image: Unlit

  In the above cases (i) and (iv), the difference image (1) does not include the effect LED, and the difference image (2) includes the difference due to the state change of the effect LED. Moreover, in the case of said (ii) and (iii), the difference resulting from the state change of production LED is contained in difference image (1), and production LED is not contained in difference image (2). According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in any of the above (i) to (iv), the effect is obtained by taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). It is possible to remove the LEDs from the image. Thereby, even if the state of the effect LED changes in any of the modes (i) to (iv), the position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence thereof.

  When the effect LED is provided in a place other than the game area 12a in the game board 12, the effect LED can be removed from the image also by setting the presence position of the effect LED as a masking area. is there. This can prevent the effect LED from being erroneously detected as a gaming ball.

  The position information of the gaming ball obtained as described above is appropriately transmitted to various devices, and used for various controls such as effects. For example, the locus of the game ball may be visualized by displaying the obtained position information of the game ball on the liquid crystal display device 13. At that time, if the game balls are displayed in different colors for each ID, it is also possible to individually track the movement of many game balls rolling on the game area 12a for each game ball.

  Such tracking of game balls can be realized by the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. In the game medium tracking process, the game ball existing at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain point in time) has moved to a position closer to the distance from the existing position at time T2 at time T3 (after the time corresponding to one frame has elapsed). It explained that assuming that. In tracking the game ball in the present embodiment, in addition to the distance, information (such as the brightness of the portion corresponding to the game ball) appearing in the difference image when the difference process is performed, and information such as the aforementioned disappearance or overlap are added. Processing may be performed.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the position of one gaming ball has not changed over a predetermined number of continuous frame images, “disappearance” of the one gaming ball Is recognized as having occurred. Then, within a predetermined range (area of disappearance detection) based on the position in the frame image of the one game ball, “disappear also for N (for example, two) or more game balls other than the one game ball When it is recognized that "has occurred," it is recognized that "ball clogging" has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to detect that "ball clogging" has occurred by piling up game balls one another, and eliminate the problem resulting from "ball clogging" (for example, prevent "grapes") ) Can get an opportunity.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap on the image, the one game ball and the other game It is recognized that "overlap" occurs with the sphere. Then, within a predetermined range (area of overlap detection) based on the position in the frame image of the one game ball, in addition to “overlap” between the one game ball and the other game ball, M If it is recognized that (for example, four or more) "overlaps" have occurred, it is recognized that "ball clogging" has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to detect that "ball clogging" has occurred by piling up game balls one another, and eliminate the problem resulting from "ball clogging" (for example, prevent "grapes") ) Can get an opportunity.

  As mentioned above, although the example which applied this invention to the pachinko game machine was demonstrated in 1st Embodiment, this invention is also applicable to game machines other than a pachinko game machine. In the second embodiment described below, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine is described. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to devices other than gaming machines as long as the device is provided with an area in which an object can move.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the game ball in the pachinko gaming machine is tracked is described. A game ball in a pachinko gaming machine corresponds to an object in the present invention. The object in the present invention is not limited to this example, and any movable object can be adopted as appropriate. In the second embodiment, an example in which a medal used for a pachislot machine is adopted as an object is described.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the game area in the pachinko gaming machine is to be photographed is described. The game area in the pachinko gaming machine corresponds to the shooting target area in the present invention. The imaging target area in the present invention is not limited to this example, and it is possible to appropriately adopt any area where the object can move. In the second embodiment, an example in which an area (a medal rail) in which medals used in a pachislot machine can move is adopted as an imaging target area.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is performed in the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) has been described. In the present invention, the circuit that performs image processing is not limited to the sub control circuit (rendering control circuit), and image processing (camera image analysis processing) may be performed in the display control circuit, audio / LED control circuit, etc. . In addition, the imaging apparatus (camera) itself (a control LSI included in the camera) may perform camera image analysis processing. When camera video analysis processing is performed by a control circuit other than the effect control circuit, all camera video analysis processing may be performed by the control circuit, or only part of the camera video analysis processing is performed by the control circuit The processing of may be performed by another control circuit. As described above, the image processing in the present invention may be shared among a plurality of control circuits. In addition, when camera image analysis processing is performed by a control circuit other than the effect control circuit, the analysis result is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and the effect pattern is controlled to be selected by the effect control circuit based on the analysis result. Good. Furthermore, the camera video is analyzed by the display control circuit etc. and the game ball is tracked without intervention of the effect control circuit (for example, the movement of the game ball is displayed on the liquid crystal display device as described above) Alternatively, only the tracking result may be fed back to the effect control circuit.

Second Embodiment
As described above, in the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine will be described. More specifically, an example will be described in which an area (a medal rail) in which medals used in a pachislot machine can be moved is photographed by a camera. In the following, for portions in which the description in the first embodiment is true in the second embodiment, the description will be omitted.

<Function flow>
First, referring to FIG. 49, the pachislot function flow will be described. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing a game. As game media, coins, game balls, game point data or tokens, etc. can be used in addition to medals.

  At the start of the game, when a player inserts a medal and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Be done.

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is carried by a main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitting display along the later-described winning determination line is determined. In addition, as a classification of combination of the symbol, it is something which relates to the “prize” to which the player is given a privilege such as payout of medals, operation of replay, activation of bonus, etc. Is provided.

  In addition, when the start lever is operated, rotation of the plurality of reels is performed. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) after the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within this prescribed time is referred to as the “number of sliding symbols”. If the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, and if the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be one symbol.

  When an internal winning combination that permits combination display of symbols relating to winning is determined, the reel stop control means normally determines that a combination of symbols has a winning determination line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for four symbols of symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means specifies, for example, for one or more reels, at the time of operation of a bonus bonus (CB) which is a second kind special character and a middle bonus (MB) for operating CB continuously. The rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the game state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

  Thus, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the prize determination means determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed along the prize determination line relates to a prize. The winning determination means is carried by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the winning is determined, a bonus such as medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows are performed as one game.

  Moreover, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, display of an image performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, output of light performed by various lamps, output of sound performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various effects are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, a random number for presentation (hereinafter, random number for presentation) is extracted separately from the random number used to determine the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determination means determines by lottery the one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determination means is carried by a sub control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means interlocks with respective triggers such as the start of the rotation of the reels, the stop of the rotations of the respective reels, the determination of the presence or absence of winning, etc. to execute the corresponding effects. Thus, in Pachislot, the player has an opportunity or opportunity to know the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of the symbols to be aimed) by executing the presentation content associated with the internal winning combination. Thus, the player's interest can be improved.

<Structure of Pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot 2001 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 50 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 2001.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the pachi-slot 2001 is provided with an exterior body 2002. The exterior body 2002 has a cabinet 2002a which accommodates a hopper device 2051 to be described later, a medal auxiliary storage 2052 and the like (see FIG. 53), and a front door 2002b attached to the cabinet 2002a in an openable / closable manner. Handles 2007 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2002a (in FIG. 50, only the handle 2007 on one side is shown). The handle 2007 is a recess that is used to carry the pachislot 2001 when carrying it.

  Inside the exterior body 2002, three reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R will be referred to as a left reel 2003L, a middle reel 2003C, and a right reel 2003R, respectively. Each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the circumferential surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) designs are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  The front door 2002b includes a door body 2009, a front panel 2010, and a liquid crystal display device 2011 showing one specific example of the display device.

  The door body 2009 is attached to the cabinet 2002a using a hinge (not shown), and opens and closes the opening of the cabinet 2002a. The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 2009 when the door body 2009 is viewed from the front of the pachislot 2001. The liquid crystal display device 2011 is attached to the top of the door body 2009. The liquid crystal display device 2011 includes a display unit (display screen) 2011a, and effects by displaying an image are performed using the liquid crystal display device 2011.

  The front panel 2010 is disposed so as to overlap the display unit 2011 a side of the liquid crystal display device 2011, and is formed in a frame shape having a panel opening 2010 a that exposes the display unit 2011 a of the liquid crystal display device 2011. A lamp group 2018 is provided on the front panel 2010. The lamp group 2018 is configured of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and lights and extinguishes light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of an effect.

  A pedestal 2012 is formed at the center of the front door 2002b. The pedestal portion 2012 is provided with a symbol display area 2004 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 2004 is disposed in front of the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R as viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R. The symbol display area 2004 functions as a display window, and is configured to be able to transmit each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R provided behind it. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 2004 is referred to as a reel display window 2004.

  When rotation of reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R provided behind the reel display window 2004 is stopped, the upper, middle, and lower stages in the frame of a plurality of types of symbols of each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R One symbol (3 in total) is displayed in each area of. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a pseudo line constituted by combining any one of predetermined three regions among the upper, middle and lower regions of the reel display window 2004 is to be won or not. It defines as a line (winning determination line) which becomes.

  The reel display window 2004 is formed by a frame member 2013 provided on the pedestal portion 2012. The frame member 2013 has a reel display window 2004, an information display window 2014, and a stop button attachment portion 2015.

  The information display window 2014 is continuously provided in the lower part of the reel display window 2004, and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 2004 and the information display window 2014 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 2014 and the reel display window 2004 are covered by a transparent window cover 2016.

  The window cover 2016 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 2013, and can not be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2002b. Further, the frame member 2013 has a sheet placement portion 2017 facing the opening of the information display window 2014 with the window cover 2016 interposed therebetween. And, between the sheet placement unit 2017 and the window cover 2016, a sheet member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is disposed. Therefore, the information sheet is covered by the window cover 2016 having a smooth surface without unevenness and gaps.

  The window cover 2016 constituting the mounting portion of the information sheet can not be removed from the front side of the front door 2002b, and is a smooth surface without unevenness and gaps. Access to the inside of can be prevented.

  The stop button attachment portion 2015 is provided below the information display window 2014, and is formed in a plane facing the front. The stop button attachment portion 2015 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R penetrate. The stop button 2019L, 2019C, 2019R is associated with each of the three reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R are referred to as a left stop button 2019L, a middle stop button 2019C, and a right stop button 2019R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, and 2019R show examples of various devices to be operated by the player. Further, in the pedestal portion 2012, a medal insertion slot 2021, a BET button 2022, and a start lever 2023 are provided as various devices to be operated by the player.

  The medal insertion slot 2021 is provided to receive a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The medal accepted in the medal insertion slot 2021 will be inserted in one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3 sheets) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the specified number will be deposited inside the pachislot 2001 It becomes possible (so-called credit function).

  The BET button 2022 is provided to determine the number of medals to be inserted into one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot 2001. The start lever 2023 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (2003L, 2003C, 2003R).

  Further, a 7-segment display 2024 formed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 2004 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 2024 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot (hereinafter, the number of credits). .

  A settlement button 2027 is provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 2012 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the front. The settlement button 2027 is provided to pull out (discharge) the medal deposited inside the pachislot 2001. Below the pedestal portion 2012, a waist panel unit 2031 is provided. The waist panel unit 2031 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source for emitting light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the lumbar panel unit 2031, a medal payout port 2032, speaker holes 2033L and 2033R, and a medal tray unit 2034 are provided. The medal payout port 2032 guides the medals discharged from the medal selector 2201 described later and the medals discharged by the driving of the hopper device 2051 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout port 2032 are stored in the medal tray unit 2034. The speaker holes 2033L and 2033R are provided to output sounds such as sound effects and music according to the contents of the effect.

[Internal structure]
51 and 52 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 2001. FIG. In FIG. 51, the front door 2002b is opened, and the middle door 2041 provided on the back side of the front door 2002b is closed with respect to the front door 2002b. Further, FIG. 52 shows a state in which the front door 2002b is opened and the middle door 2041 is open with respect to the front door 2002b. FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet 2002a. FIG. 54 is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door 2002b.

  The cabinet 2002a includes a top plate 2020a, a bottom plate 2020b, left and right side plates 2020c and 2020d, and a back plate 2020e (see FIG. 53). A cabinet speaker 2042 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2002a. The cabinet-side speaker 2042 is attached to the back plate 2020 e of the cabinet 2002 a via the mounting brackets 2043 L and 2043 R. The cabinet speaker 2042 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  The cabinet side relay board 2044 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet side speaker 2042 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The cabinet-side relay board 2044 is attached to the left side plate 2020 c of the cabinet 2002 a. The cabinet-side relay board 2044 includes a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56) described later attached to the middle door 2041 (see FIGS. 51 and 52), a hopper device 2051, a medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and medal payout Relay the wiring connecting the count switch (not shown).

  An amplifier substrate 2045 for controlling the output of sound from the cabinet side speaker 2042 is disposed at a central portion inside the cabinet 2002a. The amplifier substrate 2045 is attached to a mounting shelf 2046 fixed to the left and right side plates 2020 c and 2020 d.

  Further, when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front, an external concentrated terminal plate 2047 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier substrate 2045 (see FIG. 53). The external concentrated terminal plate 2047 is attached to the right side plate 2020 d of the cabinet 2002 a. The external concentrated terminal plate 2047 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  A sub power supply 2048 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier substrate 2045 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 2048 is attached to the left side plate 2020c of the cabinet 2002a. The sub power supply device 2048 supplies a power of AC 100 V to a power supply device 2053 described later. Further, power of 100 V AC is converted into power of DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier substrate 2045.

  On the lower side inside the cabinet 2002a, a medal payout device (hereinafter, a hopper device) 2051, a medal auxiliary storage 2052, and a power supply device 2053 are disposed.

  The hopper device 2051 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 2020b in the cabinet 2002a. The hopper device 2051 has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. For example, when the settlement button 2027 (see FIG. 50) is pressed to settle the medals deposited inside the pachislot, the hopper device 2051 discharges the accommodated medals by the number of credits. The medals paid out by the hopper device 2051 are discharged from the medal payout opening 2032 (see FIG. 50).

  The medal auxiliary storage 2052 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 2051. The medal auxiliary storage 2052 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 2051 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 2052 is engaged with the bottom plate 2020b of the cabinet 2002a, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate 2020b.

  The power supply device 2053 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 2051 when the inside of the cabinet 2002a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 2020c. The power supply device 2053 has a power switch 2053a and a power supply substrate 2053b (see FIG. 56). The power supply device 2053 converts the power of the AC voltage 100 V supplied from the sub power supply device 2048 into the power of the necessary DC voltage at each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 51, 52 and 54, the middle door 2041 is disposed at the center of the back of the front door 2002b, and is configured to be able to open and close the reel display window 2004 (see FIG. 52) from the back. Door stoppers 2041 a, 2041 b and 2041 c are provided at the upper and lower parts of the middle door 2041. The door stoppers 2041a, 2041b and 2041c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 2041 in a state where the reel display window 2004 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 2041, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 2041a, 2041b, and 2041c to release the fixation of the middle door 2041.

  A main control board case 2055 accommodating a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56) and three reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R are attached to the middle door 2041. A stepping motor is connected to the three reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R via gears having a predetermined speed reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the main control board case 2055 is provided with a setting key type switch 2056. The setting key type switch 2056 is used to change the setting of the pachislot 2001 or to confirm the setting of the pachislot 2001. In the present embodiment, a main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 2055 and the main control board 2071 housed in the main control board case 2055.

  The main control board 2071 housed in the main control board case 2055 constitutes a main control circuit 2091 (see FIG. 57) described later. The main control circuit 2091 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 2001, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and determination of the presence or absence of a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 2091 will be described later.

  Above the middle door 2041, a sub control board case 2057 for accommodating the sub control board 2072 (see FIG. 56) is disposed, and above the sub control board case 2057, a center speaker 2058 is disposed. The sub control board 2072 housed in the sub control board case 2057 constitutes a sub control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58). The sub control circuit 2101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying a video or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 2101 will be described later.

  When the front door 2002b is viewed from the back side, a sub relay board 2061 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 2057. The sub relay board 2061 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 2072 and the main control board 2071. In addition, it is a board which relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 2072 and the board disposed around the sub control board 2072. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 2072, LED board 2062A, 2062B, 2062C mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C are disposed on both sides of the sub control substrate case 2057 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2002b. These LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C are a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 2082 (see FIG. 56) showing one specific example of the light source according to the effects executed by the control of the sub control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58). ) To light and display a blinking pattern. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a plurality of LED substrates are provided in addition to the LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, and 2062C.

  Below the sub relay board 2061, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 2063 is disposed. The 24h door opening and closing monitoring unit 2063 stores the opening and closing history of the middle door 2041. Further, when the middle door 2041 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 2011 is output to the sub control board 2072 (sub control circuit 2101).

  Below the middle door 2041, a board speaker 2064 and lower speakers 2065L and 2065R are disposed. The board speaker 2064 faces the waist panel unit 2031 (see FIG. 50), and the lower speakers 2065L and 2065R face the speaker holes 2033L and 2033R (see FIG. 50).

  A medal selector 2201, a medal chute 2202, and a door open / close monitoring switch 2067 are disposed above the lower speaker 2065L. The medal selector 2201 is a device that determines whether or not the material, shape, etc. of the medal is appropriate, and guides the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 2021 to the hopper device 2051 through the slope 2203, or the medal Guide to the chute 2202. The specific configuration of the medal selector 2201 will be described later.

  The medal chute 2202 is a substantially Y-shaped tubular member, and guides the medal guided by the medal selector 2201 and the medal discharged from the hopper device 2051 to the medal payout port 2032 (see FIG. 50).

  The door open / close monitoring switch 2067 is disposed on the left side of the medal selector 2201 when the front door 2002b is viewed from the back side. The door open / close monitoring switch 2067 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2002b to the outside of the pachislot 2001.

  A door relay terminal plate 2068 is disposed below the reel display window 4 and in an area opened and closed by the middle door 2041 (see FIG. 52). The door relay terminal board 2068 includes a main control board 2071 (see FIG. 56) in the main control board case 2055, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 2072 (see FIG. 56), a medal selector 2201 and a game operation display board It is a board which relays wiring with 2081 (see FIG. 56). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 2022, a settlement button 2027, a door open / close monitoring switch 2067, a BET switch 2077 described later, and a start switch 2079.

<Movement path of medals>
FIG. 55 is a view showing a moving path of the medal when the medal selector guides the medal to the hopper device.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the upper end portion of the medal selector 2201 is provided with a medal entrance portion 2211 for receiving a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 2021 (see FIG. 50). The medals (medals 2120 a, 2120 b, 2120 c) inserted into the medal selector 2201 from the medal entrance portion 2211 move downward from above along the medal rails 2210. A medal outlet 2204 is provided below the medal selector 2201. The medals (medals 2120a, 2120b, 2120c) moved in the medal selector 2201 are discharged from the medal outlet portion 2204 and accommodated in the hopper device 2051 via the slope 2203 (see FIG. 52).

  Although not shown, the medal selector 2201 is provided with a camera unit. The camera unit is a unit for determining whether an object moving on the medal rail 2210 is a regular medal. The camera unit is provided with a CMOS image sensor, an LED, and a control LSI.

  The CMOS image sensor is arranged to be able to image the entire medal rail 2210, and images medals (medals 2120a, 2120b, 2120c) moving on the medal rail 2210, and the image data of the imaged medals is used as a control LSI. Output. The LED emits surface light around the CMOS image sensor and illuminates the medal moving on the medal rail 2210. The control LSI determines whether the object moving on the medal rail 2210 is a regular medal or not based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor. In addition, the control LSI executes predetermined processing (processing similar to the camera image analysis processing shown in FIG. 31) on the image data to determine whether the medals flow normally on the medal rail 2210 or not. Can be determined.

<Pachislo Circuit Configuration>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachislot 2001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. First, with reference to FIG. 56, the outline of the entire circuit provided in Pachi-Slot 2001 will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachi slot 1.

  The pachi slot 2001 has a main control board 2071 disposed on the middle door 2041 and a sub control board 2072 disposed on the front door 2002 b. The main control board 2071 includes a reel relay terminal board 2074, a setting key type switch 2056, an external concentrated terminal board 2047, a hopper device 2051, a medal auxiliary storage switch 2075, and a power supply board 2053b of the power supply device 2053. It is connected. The setting key type switch 2056, the external concentrated terminal board 2047, the hopper device 2051 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 are connected to the main control board 2071 via the cabinet side relay board 2044. The external concentrated terminal plate 2047 and the hopper device 2051 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The reel relay terminal board 2074 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R. The reel relay terminal board 2074 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 2071 to the stepping motor.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 penetrates a switch through hole (not shown) of the medal auxiliary storage 2052. The medal auxiliary storage switch 2075 detects whether the medal auxiliary storage 2052 is full of medals.

  A power switch 2053 a is connected to the power supply substrate 2053 b of the power supply device 2053. The power switch 2053a is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachi-slot 2001.

  Further, on the main control board 2071, the medal selector 2201, the door open / close monitoring switch 2067, the BET switch 2077, the settlement switch 2078, the start switch 2079, the stop switch board 2080, the game operation display board 2081 via the door relay terminal board 2068. And the sub relay board 2061 are connected. The door open / close monitoring switch 2067 and the sub relay board 2061 have been described above, so the description will be omitted.

  The BET switch 2077 detects that the BET button 2022 is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 2078 detects that the settlement button 2027 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 2079 detects that the player has operated the start lever 2023 (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 2080 is a substrate that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 2080 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 2019L, 2019C, 2019R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 2081 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 2024 when the three reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R can be turned and replay is performed when accepting the insertion of medals. It is a substrate for A 7-segment display 2024 and an LED 2082 are connected to the game operation display board 2081. The LED 2082 lights, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark to perform the re-game, and the like.

  The sub control board 2072 is connected to the main control board 2071 via the door relay terminal board 2068 and the sub relay board 2061. A sound I / O substrate 2084 and LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, 2062C, and 24h door open / close monitoring unit 2063 are connected to the sub control substrate 2072 via the sub relay substrate 2061. The LED substrates 2062A, 2062B, 2062C, and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 2063 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The sound I / O substrate 2084 outputs sound to speakers (not shown) provided on the center speaker 2058, the board speaker 2064, the lower speakers 2065L and 2065R, and the front door 2002b.

  Further, a ROM cartridge substrate 2086 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 are connected to the sub control substrate 2072. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 are accommodated in the sub control substrate case 2057 together with the sub control substrate 2072. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 is a substrate for managing the image (video) for presentation, sound, the LED substrates 2062A and 2062B and other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 2087 is a substrate for relaying a wire connecting the sub control substrate 2072 and the liquid crystal display device 2011.

[Main control circuit]
Next, a main control circuit 2091 including the main control board 2071 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 2091 of the pachislot 2001.

  The main control circuit 2091 has a microcomputer 2092 installed on the main control board 2071 as a main component. The microcomputer 2092 comprises a main CPU 2093, a main ROM 2094 and a main RAM 2095.

  The main ROM 2094 is used to transmit various control commands (commands) to the control program (for example, the program for executing the above-mentioned internal lottery process) executed by the main CPU 2093, the data table, and the sub control circuit 2101. Data etc. are stored. The main RAM 2095 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  A clock pulse generation circuit 2096, a frequency divider 2097, a random number generator 2098 and a sampling circuit 2099 are connected to the main CPU 2093. Clock pulse generation circuit 2096 and frequency divider 2097 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 2093 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 2098 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 2099 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 2093 counts the number of times the pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 2093 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R (mainly, how many reels have been rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index is provided at, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and at a predetermined position of each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and the rotation Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the respective reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 2095. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 2095 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 2003L, 2003C, 2003R is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, when the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, the symbols of the left reel 2003L in the middle of the reel display window 2004 when the left stop button 2019L is pressed, and the four symbols Each symbol within the range to the previous symbol is a symbol that can be stopped at the middle of the reel display window 2004.

[Sub control circuit]
Next, the sub control circuit 2101 configured by the sub control substrate 2072 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 2101 of the pachislot 2001.

  The sub control circuit 2101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 2091 and performs processing such as determination of an effect content and execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 2091. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 2102, a sub RAM 2103, a rendering processor 2104, a drawing RAM 2105, and a driver 2106.

  The sub CPU 2102 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 2086 according to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 2091. The ROM cartridge substrate 2086 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program to be executed by the sub CPU 2102. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 2091 and an effect registration task for extracting effect random numbers and effect content (effect data) determination and registration Is included. In addition, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 2011 (refer to FIG. 50) based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as an LED 2082, speakers 2058, 2064, 2065L , An audio control task for controlling the output of sound by a speaker such as 2065R.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of a video. Also, a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 2103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 2102, the rendering processor 2104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 2105, and the 2 driver 106 create a video according to the animation data specified by the rendering content, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created video.

  Further, the sub CPU 2102 causes the speakers such as the speakers 2058, 2064, 2065L, 2065R, etc. to output the sound such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 2102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the light source such as the LED 2082 according to the lamp data specified by the contents of the effect.

  The pachislot 2001 according to the second embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

  According to the pachi-slot 2001 of the second embodiment, the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is executed by the control LSI provided in the camera unit disposed in the medal selector 2201. Thus, it can be determined whether the medals are flowing down normally on the medal rails 2210. In addition, by executing the process (refer to FIG. 47) related to the clogging / loss detection, for example, when the medal is clogged in the medal rail 2210, it is possible to detect the medal clogging. The analysis result of such a camera image is transmitted to the main control circuit 2091 (see FIG. 57) and the sub control circuit 2101 (see FIG. 58), and processing based on the analysis result (for example, FIG. 47) Step S357 and step S361) may be configured to be performed.

  In the second embodiment, the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is described as being executed by the control LSI of the camera unit. Hereinafter, as a modification, a case where the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) is performed in the sub control circuit 2101 will be described. In this modification, a control LSI included in a camera unit transmits frame image data to the sub control circuit 2101 in response to a request from the sub CPU 2102 which constitutes the sub control circuit 2101. The processing executed in the sub control circuit 2101 is substantially the same as the processing of FIGS. 26 to 31 described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. In the following, processing executed in the main control circuit 2091 will be described.

[Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, main control main processing under control of the main CPU 2093 will be described. 59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main control main process of the Pachislot 2001.

  First, when the pachi slot 2001 is powered on, the main CPU 2093 performs processing at power on (step S1001). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or whether the setting change has been properly performed, and the initialization process according to the determination result is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (unit game) (step S1002). In this process, the main CPU 2093 specifies and initializes, for example, a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area or the display combination storing area of the main RAM 2095 is cleared.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (step S1003). In this process, the main CPU 2093 validates the winning determination line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether the start operation is possible.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 extracts a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area (step S1004). This random value is used in an internal lottery process (step S1006) described later. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 extracts the effect random number value, and stores it in the effect random number value storage area (step S1005). The effect random number is used in the lock determination process. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs an internal lottery process (step S1006). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines an internal winning combination. The internal winning combination is determined by performing lottery based on the internal lottery table according to the gaming state (general gaming state, bonus gaming state, RT gaming state, etc.).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a reel stop initial setting process (step S1007). In this process, the main CPU 2093 performs initialization of a region related to control for stopping rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 generates start command data, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1008). The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in communication data transmission processing (FIG. 62) described later. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game state, etc.) necessary for the effect such as the internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub control circuit 2101 can perform an effect according to the start operation.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a game start lock process (step S1009). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines whether to delay the timing to start the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R based on the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a weight process (step S1010). In this process, the main CPU 2093 stands by until a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the previous game start, or until a lock time (for example, 5 seconds) set in the game start lock process elapses Do. The lock time set by the game start lock process may be absorbed by invalidating the stop operation of the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, 2019R after the start of rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R. In this case, the player can recognize that the locking is performed because the stop operation is not possible even though the rotation is started. In addition, during this locking, the reel may be slowly rotated or reversely rotated (reel action) to make it easier to recognize that the locking is in progress.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs reel rotation start processing (step S1011). In this process, the main CPU 2093 requests start of rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, and stores a reel rotation start command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1012). The reel rotation start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in the communication data transmission process (FIG. 62). By this processing, the sub control circuit 2101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a drawing priority storage process (step S1013). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a reel stop control process (step S1014).

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a winning search process (step S1015). In this process, the main CPU 2093 collates the symbol combination table displayed along the winning determination line with the symbol combination table after the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R are stopped, determines the display combination, and determines the number of medals to be paid out. I do.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs RT control processing (step S1016). In this process, the RT gaming state flag is updated according to the display combination.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 pays out medals based on the payout number of medals determined in the process of step S1015 (step S1017). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 stores the winning operation command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1018). The stored winning operation command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2101 in the communication data transmission process (FIG. 62) of the interrupt process described later.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 performs a game end lock process (step S1019). In this process, the main CPU 2093 determines whether to lock the progress of the game based on the internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs bonus end check processing (step S1020). In this process, the main CPU 2093 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied. Specifically, in this process, the main CPU 2093 subtracts the number of medals paid out (see step S1015) from the value of the bonus end number counter, and the value of the bonus end number counter becomes smaller than 0. , End the operation of the bonus game. As a bonus game, BB gaming state and MB gaming state can be mentioned.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a bonus operation check process (step S1021), and then performs the process of step S1002. In this process, the main CPU 2093 starts the operation of the bonus game when the condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied, and performs the operation of the re-game when the condition for the re-game is satisfied. Specifically, in this process, when the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is the symbol combination corresponding to BB (or MB), the main CPU 2093 starts the operation of the bonus game, and the bonus end number counter Set the predetermined value to.

[Interrupt process]
In the pachislot 2001 of the present embodiment, the main CPU 2093 interrupts the main processing at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1.173 mS) and executes the interrupt processing even while the main processing is being executed. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the interrupt process.

  First, the main CPU 2093 saves a register (step S1031). Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs input port check processing (step S1032). In this process, the main CPU 2093 confirms the presence or absence of a signal to be transmitted to the microcomputer 2092. For example, the main CPU 2093 stores on-edge and off-edge of the start switch 2079, the stop switch and the like for each interrupt processing. Further, the main CPU 2093 stores an input state command including information on on edge and off edge of various switches in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2101 in a communication data transmission process described later. Thereby, various effects can be performed using operation means such as the start lever 2023 and the stop buttons 2019L, 2019C, 2019R.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs timer update processing (step S1033). Next, the main CPU 2093 performs communication data transmission processing described later (step S1034). In this process, the command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 2101. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs processing of controlling the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R (step S1035). More specifically, the main CPU 2093 starts to rotate the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R in response to a request to start the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, 2003R, that is, the reels at a constant speed. Control is performed so that 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R rotate. Further, in response to the stop operation, control is performed such that the rotation of the reels 2003L, 2003C, and 2003R corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 performs a lamp 7SEG driving process (step S1036). For example, the main CPU 2093 displays the number of medals credited, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Subsequently, the main CPU 2093 restores the register (step S1037), and ends the processing of the regularly occurring interrupt.

[Communication data transmission process]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of communication data transmission processing called in the processing of step S1034 in FIG. First, the main CPU 2093 subtracts one from the communication data transmission timer (step S1051), and then determines whether the communication data transmission timer is 0 (step S1052). If the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES in step S1052), the main CPU 2093 shifts the process to step S1053. On the other hand, when the communication data transmission timer is not 0 in step S1052 (when the determination in step S1052 is NO), the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S1053, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not there is unsent data in the communication data storage area. If there is unsent data (if the determination in step S1053 is YES), the main CPU 2093 moves the process to step S1055. If there is no unsent data (if the determination in step S1053 is NO), the main CPU 2093 moves the process to step S1054.

  In step S1054, the main CPU 2093 generates non-operation command data, and stores the generated non-operation command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095. That is, when there is no unsent data in the communication data storage area, the main CPU 2093 stores non-operation command data in the communication data storage area. As a result, a state in which command data to be transmitted in the communication data storage area is always stored is generated. Specifically, the main CPU 2093 generates an operation state stored in the main RAM 2095 as a no-operation command in the above-described input port check process (step S1032). The data representing the operation state generated as a no-operation command has a condition (a state in which the input state command has been transmitted and cleared) in the communication data transmission process (step S1056) after which the no-operation command is transmitted. When the condition is satisfied, the signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101. The input state command is command data related to the effect, and means an operation corresponding command for the effect corresponding to the operation of the switch or the like. On the other hand, the non-operation command is a command (operation non-corresponding command) transmitted when an operation corresponding command such as an input state command is not transmitted.

  When there is no unsent data in the communication data storage area, it is not essential to transmit the no-operation command to the sub control circuit 2101 and the processing of step S1053 and step S1054 may not be performed.

  In step S1055, the main CPU 2093 sets an initial value (16) in the communication data transmission timer. That is, since the communication data transmission timer is at 0 in step S1052 described above, the main CPU 2093 newly sets the communication data transmission timer to the initial value (16) in step S1055. As a result, each time the communication data transmission process is performed from the next communication data transmission process, the communication data transmission timer is sequentially decremented by one, and it is possible to obtain the timing to transmit the communication data.

  After the processing of step S1055, the main CPU 2093 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area (step S1056). In this case, in the communication data storage area, command data (for example, initialization command data, medal input command data, start command data, reel rotation start, etc. stored in the communication data storage area by the processing in the main control circuit 2091 so far) Command data, reel stop command data, winning operation command data, bonus start command data, bonus end command data, input state command data, etc.) or if there is no data to be transmitted, the data is stored in step S1054 described above By storing the non-operation command data, some command data is always transmitted.

  After the processing of step S1056, the main CPU 2093 updates the communication data storage area (step S1057), and ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the main CPU 2093 transmits the command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 2101 at each predetermined timing counted by the communication data transmission timer by executing the communication data transmission processing. . The sub control circuit 2101 executes command analysis processing (see step S204 in FIG. 26) based on the received command data.

[Demo command sending process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a demonstration command transmission process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The demonstration command transmission process shown in FIG. 63 is performed in the interrupt process (see FIG. 61). For example, after the process of step S1032 is performed, the demo command transmission process may be performed before the process of step S1033 is performed.

  In the demonstration command transmission process, first, the main CPU 2093 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted (step S1071). In this process, the main CPU 2093 is in the medal insertable state after the predetermined time has elapsed from when the medal payout process (see step S1017 in FIG. 60) is performed until the start switch 2079 is turned on. to decide. If it is determined that the medal insertion enable state is not set, the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the medal can be inserted, the main CPU 2093 determines whether the error flag is set to on (step S1072). The error flag is a flag indicating that an error has occurred (see step S1082). At power-on, the error flag is set to off. The error may include, for example, a hopper empty error indicating that the number of medals stored in the hopper device 2051 has decreased. In addition, a medal clogging error indicating that the medal has been clogged by the medal rail 2210 can also be mentioned. As described above, when it is detected that the medal is clogged in the medal rail 2210, the main CPU 2093 generates a medal clogging error if a signal indicating that is transmitted to the main control circuit 2091. You can recognize that.

  If it is determined that the error flag is not set on, the main CPU 2093 determines whether the demonstration command transmission flag is set on (step S1073). At power-on, the demo command transmission flag is set to off. If it is determined that the demo command transmission flag is not set on, the main CPU 2093 sets an initial value to the demo command transmission timer (step S1074), and sets the demo command transmission flag on (step S1075).

  If it is determined in step S1073 that the demonstration command transmission flag is set to ON, or after the process of step S1075 is executed, the main CPU 2093 subtracts one from the demonstration command transmission timer (step S1076). When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 2021, or when a medal is inserted by pressing the BET button 2022, subtraction of the demo command transmission timer is canceled, and the demo command transmission timer is initialized again. Is set.

  Next, the main CPU 2093 determines whether the demo command transmission timer is 0 or not (step S1077). If it is determined that the demo command transmission timer is not 0, the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1072 that the error flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S1077 that the demo command transmission timer is 0, an error (eg, a hopper empty error or a medal jam error) is detected by the main CPU 2093. Etc.) is determined (step S1078).

  If it is determined that an error has not occurred, the main CPU 2093 generates demo command data, and stores the generated demo command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 2095 (step S1079). The demo command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2091 to the sub control circuit 2101 in the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 62). When the demonstration command data is received, the secondary control circuit 2101 performs processing relating to display of the demonstration screen (see step S112 in FIG. 20).

  Then, the main CPU 2093 sets the demonstration command transmission flag off (step S1080), and sets the error flag off (step S1081). Thereafter, the main CPU 2093 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1078 that an error has occurred, the main CPU 2093 sets an error flag on (step S1082), and then the present subroutine ends.

  The processing executed in the main control circuit 2091 of the pachislot 2001 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63.

  Although not described above, in the Pachislot 2001, an AT gaming state may be provided. The AT gaming state is a state in which information (for example, pressing order (stopping order of stop buttons)) for winning a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination is notified. In the AT gaming state, when a predetermined push order (an internal winning combination that defines a combination in which winning is achieved by pressing the stop button in an appropriate order) is internally won, the push order corresponding to the push order When the player is notified, the player can win a combination defined by the pressing order by operating the stop button in accordance with the notified pressing order.

  Further, in the Pachislot 2001, a state (high RT gaming state) may be provided in which the winning probability of replay is relatively high. Furthermore, such a high RT gaming state, and a state (ART gaming state) in which a notification in the AT gaming state is performed may be provided. In the high RT gaming state, since replay is won with high probability, consumption of gaming media (medals) can be reduced. On the other hand, in the AT gaming state, information on the order (pushing order) necessary for winning a combination with a large number of game media (medal) paid out is notified to the player in an efficient manner. Can provide an opportunity to increase medals).

  Such an ART gaming state can be configured to shift, for example, upon winning an ART lottery performed when a predetermined internal winning combination is won internally. Also, the ART gaming state can be configured to end when a predetermined number of unit games have been played. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is established, the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state (the number of ART games) may be increased (added).

  In the above, the example which applied this invention to the pachislot machine was demonstrated. Below, the modification which applied this invention to the roulette apparatus is demonstrated. FIG. 64 is a top view of the roulette device.

  The roulette device 2500 includes a frame 2501 fixed to a housing, and a roulette wheel 2502 rotatably accommodated and supported inside the frame 2501. A large number (38) of concave numbered pockets 2503 are formed on the top surface of the roulette wheel 2502. Furthermore, on the upper surface of the roulette wheel 2502 in the outward direction of each number pocket 2503, numbers corresponding to the number pockets 2503 are displayed with numbers “0”, “00”, and “1” to “36”. A display plate 2504 is formed.

  A ball insertion port 2507 is formed inside the frame body 2501. A ball insertion device (not shown) is connected to the ball insertion port 2507, and the ball 2505 is inserted onto the roulette wheel 2502 from the ball insertion port 2507 as the ball insertion device is driven.

  Below the roulette wheel 2502, a wheel drive motor (not shown) is provided, and the roulette wheel 2502 rotates with the drive of the wheel drive motor.

  In addition, metal plates (not shown) are attached below the roulette wheel 2502 at predetermined intervals, and the position of the number pocket 2503 can be detected by the proximity sensor detecting this metal plate. ing.

  The frame body 2501 is gently inclined inward and a guide wall 2506 is formed in the middle portion thereof. The guide wall 2506 guides the introduced ball 2505 against centrifugal force to roll the ball 2505. When the rotation speed of the ball 2505 decreases and the centrifugal force is lost, it rolls off the slope of the frame 2501 and travels inward to the rotating roulette wheel 2502. Then, the ball 2505 rolled on the roulette wheel 2502 is stored on one of the number pockets 2503 by passing over the number display plate 2504 outside the rotating roulette wheel 2502. As a result, the number described on the number display plate 2504 corresponding to the stored number pocket 2503 is determined by the ball sensor, and it becomes the winning number.

  Such a roulette device 2500 is photographed by a camera, and the same processing as camera video analysis processing (see FIG. 31) is performed on a camera image obtained by photographing. Thereby, the movement of the ball 2505 until it is stored in the number pocket 2503 can be tracked.

  Such a roulette device may be provided in a pachislot machine. Specifically, a roulette machine is attached to an appropriate position in the pachislot machine (for example, the pedestal portion 2012 (see FIG. 50) of the front door 2002b in the pachislot 2001), and a roulette game is performed according to the game situation. It is also good. In that case, the number of number pockets may be smaller (for example, about three to six). In such a pachislot machine, for example, it is possible to suggest the presence or absence of a bonus or winning in ART based on the result (win number) of the roulette game, or to determine the number of times to add the number of ART games. It is. In such a pachislot machine, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the movement of the ball by tracking the movement of the ball until it is stored in the number pocket and performing the rendering based on the tracking result. Yes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Third Embodiment
The first and second embodiments have been described above. The third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of portions in which the descriptions in the first embodiment and the second embodiment also apply to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Game media tracking process>
In the first embodiment, the processing shown in FIG. 42 is described as the gaming medium tracking processing (see step S286 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65 is performed.

  FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing a game medium tracking process executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the size of the gaming ball in the ball position image. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the size of the game ball and the size of the search range in the ball position image. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a search range setting table.

  Similar to the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 42, in the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65, the game ball at time T2 (see FIG. 41A) and the game ball at time T3 (see FIG. 41B) It is a process which performs matching. As described in the first embodiment, an image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T2 is referred to as a ball position image (T2), and an image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T3 is referred to as a ball position image (T3) Do. The sphere position image (T2) is an AND image (see FIG. 37) of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), and the sphere position image (T3) is a difference image (2) and a difference image (3) And an AND image.

  In the game medium tracking process shown in FIG. 65, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of step S1301 to step S1303, but these processes are similar to the processes of step S301 to step S303 of FIG.

  In step S1303, as in step S303 in FIG. 42, the sub CPU 201 determines the positions of each of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) and one game ball at time T2 (for example, ID (1)). Comparing with the search range set for the game ball), it is determined whether or not there are game balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3) Do.

  As described in the first embodiment, a plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T2) (a plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a at time T2) are associated with the IDs of the game balls, respectively. It is done. Then, a search range is set for each of the plurality of game balls (a plurality of IDs). The search range is a region where game balls existing at a certain position at time T2 (at a certain time) are likely to exist at time T3 (after the time corresponding to one frame has elapsed) It is the range where the sphere can move).

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 43), a search range is set in the vicinity of the position of the gaming ball for each gaming ball included in the ball position image (T2). However, the size of the search range differs depending on the position of the gaming ball in the ball position image (T2). Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

  At a certain time (time T2), the gaming ball of ID (1) is at the position shown in FIG. 66 (a) on the gaming board 12 (playing area 12a), and the gaming ball of ID (2) is the gaming board 12 It is assumed that (playing area 12a) is in the position shown in FIG. 66 (b). The distance in the vertical direction between the gaming ball of ID (1) and the CCD camera 1000 is α, and the distance in the vertical direction between the gaming ball of ID (2) and the CCD camera 1000 is β. The game ball of ID (2) is located below the game ball of ID (1), and α <β.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming area 12a is formed as a flat surface, and the gaming ball is substantially restrained by the plane and basically moves only in a two-dimensional direction. . Since the direction of the plane is vertical, the distance in the horizontal direction between the gaming ball and the CCD camera 1000 is constant (γ). In the present embodiment, the distance between the CCD camera 1000 and the game board 12 is quite short (see FIG. 6), and the values of α and β are considerably large (for example, 5 times to the value of γ). 50 times or 10 times to about 30 times). In FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), γ is shown as a relatively large value for the sake of clarity.

  FIG. 66C shows the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2) in the ball position image (T2). FIG. 66 (c) shows the entire ball position image (T2), and in fact, many game balls are included in addition to the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2). The illustration of the game ball other than the game ball of ID (1) and the game ball of ID (2) is omitted.

  The ball position image has a rectangular shape. In FIG. 66 (c), the distance from the upper side of the ball position image (T2) (rectangle) is α 'in the gaming ball of ID (1), ID The game ball of (2) is β '. The ratio of α ′ to β ′ is the same as the ratio of α to β (α: β = α ′: β ′), and α ′ <β ′.

  Also, due to the fact that the game ball of ID (1) is closer to the CCD camera 1000 than the game ball of ID (2), in the ball position image, the game ball of ID (1) Is larger than the game ball of ID (2). Specifically, the diameter of the gaming ball of ID (1) is β / α times the diameter of the gaming ball of ID (2). In the present embodiment, the size (diameter) of the gaming ball in the ball position image is inversely proportional to the distance in the vertical direction between the gaming ball in the gaming area 12 a and the CCD camera 1000.

  FIG. 67 shows the search range set for such a game ball of ID (1) and ID (2). The search range (1) set for the game ball of ID (1) is wider than the search range (2) set for the game ball of ID (2). In the present embodiment, the size of the search range set for one gaming ball is proportional to the area of the gaming ball in the ball position image.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the X axis is set along the upper side of the ball position image (rectangle), and the Y axis is set along the left side, and the position of the gaming ball in the ball position image is determined by the X axis coordinate value and the Y axis. When it represents with the value of a coordinate, the search range set with respect to one game ball becomes the area according to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the said game ball. Specifically, the search range is set as an area having a rectangular shape (rectangular area), and the size of the search range set for one gaming ball (the length in the X axis direction and the Y axis in the rectangular area The length of the direction is proportional to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the gaming ball regardless of the value of the X-axis coordinate of the gaming ball. Note that the position of the gaming ball is represented by the position coordinates of the center of gravity of the gaming ball, and the center of gravity of the search range corresponds to the center of gravity of the gaming ball.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67, the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the gaming ball of ID (1) is α ′, and the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the gaming ball of ID (2) is β ′ (FIG. 66 (c) reference). As a result, when the size of the search range (1) and the size of the search range (2) are compared, the search range (1) searches both the length in the X axis direction and the length in the Y axis direction in the rectangular area. It becomes (beta) '/ (alpha)' (= (beta) / (alpha)) time of range (2).

  For example, it is assumed that the value of Y-axis coordinate of the game ball of ID (1) is 50 (α ′ = 50) and the value of Y-axis coordinate of the game ball of ID (2) is 100 (β ′ = 100). It is assumed that the range (1) is a square area having a length in the X-axis direction and a length in the Y-axis direction of 2, respectively. In this case, the search range (2) can be a square area in which the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction are each 1 (= 2 × 50/100).

  In step S1303 of FIG. 65, the sub CPU 201 explains one gaming ball (for example, the gaming ball of ID (1) or the gaming ball of ID (2)) at time T2 using FIG. 66 and FIG. 67. As described above, the search range is set based on the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the gaming ball. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball belonging to the search range is present among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T3).

  If it is determined that there are gaming balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1304 to step S1306. The process is the same as the process of steps S304 to S306 in FIG. 42, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no gaming ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T3), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1307 and step S1308. Since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S307 and S308 in FIG. 42, the description thereof is omitted here.

  In step S1307, when it is determined that the game ball is not lost in the discharge area, that is, the gaming ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed is the discharge area at time T2 (see FIG. 39) If it is determined that it does not belong to the sub CPU 201, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a gaming ball is present in the masking area (step S1309). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a part of the masking area (see FIG. 38) in the search range, and determines whether or not the game ball is present in the search range.

  As described in the first embodiment, the masking area is in principle excluded from the object of image processing, but here, a search is performed for the masking area. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is an area within a certain range from the position at time T2 of the game ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed among the entire masking area By executing image processing such as front and rear frame difference extraction processing (see step S 284 in FIG. 31) on a masking area located in the vicinity, it is determined whether a game ball is present in the area.

  Here, the masking area is an area set in advance as an area in which the game ball is easily lost. For example, since there is a possibility that the LED may be erroneously detected as a game ball, it is desirable to set an area within a predetermined range from the arrangement position of the LED (an area where the lighting of the LED is particularly severe). In order to perform an inter-frame difference extraction process on such an area, for example, a method (see FIG. 73) as described in the fourth embodiment to be described later may be used. The masking area is composed of a large number of rectangular areas. By reducing the area of each rectangular area, the range of the masking area included in the search range can be easily adjusted. As a result, only the minimum necessary masking area can be included in the search range, and it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load due to the excess masking area being included in the search range. it can.

  If it is determined in step S1309 that a gaming ball is present in the masking area, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification on the assumption that the gaming ball has disappeared outside the ball passing area (step S1310). In this process, the sub-CPU 201 normally places the gaming ball in the area where the gaming ball can not exist (for example, the area where the bonus is disposed) in the masking area (for example, the gaming ball is in the center) When jumping over a character, when a game ball is caught on a decorative character, etc.), an error signal indicating that an error has occurred is sent to the display control circuit 205 or the voice control circuit 206, as necessary. . As a result, an image notifying that an error has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and a sound notifying that an error has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In addition, the sub CPU 201 may transmit an error signal to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). Also, in this case, the sub CPU 201 may release the ID currently being processed. In the case where an area where the above-mentioned lighting of the LED is particularly intense is set as the masking area, if it is determined that gaming balls are present in the area, an error does not necessarily occur, so The CPU 201 may not perform the process of step S1310.

  After executing the processing of step S1310, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1305. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may end this subroutine after error notification. Further, when the ID currently being processed is not released in the process of step S1310, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1304 and determines the position information of the gaming ball determined to be present in the masking area. It is also possible to associate IDs (set a mark).

  If it is determined in step S1309 that no gaming ball is present in the masking area, sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1311 and step S1312, but these processing are similar to the processing of step S309 and step S310 of FIG. Since this is a process, the description here is omitted.

  After executing the processing of step S1312, the sub CPU 201 starts the addition of the erasure timer. The value of the disappearance timer is the elapsed time after the search process (the process of step S1303) for the ID currently being processed (the time elapsed since the start of the search process, and during the search process) This corresponds to the time elapsed as the starting point, the time elapsed after the end of the search processing, and the like.

  If it is determined in step S1311 that the erasure flag is set to ON in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed, or after the processing of step S1313, the sub CPU 201 In step S1314, the search range for the ID (for example, ID (1)) is set again according to the value of the erasure timer.

  In the present embodiment, a search range setting table shown in FIG. 68 is stored in the program ROM 202. In the search range setting table, the correspondence relationship between the range of possible values of the erasure timer and the scaling factor for the initial search range is defined, and the larger the value of the erasure timer, the larger the value is set as the scaling factor for the initial search range. ing. The first search range is a search range which is set for each ID for the first time when searching the ball position image (T3), and is set as described with reference to FIG. In the process of step S 1314, the sub CPU 201 refers to the search range setting table stored in the program ROM 202 to acquire the scaling factor corresponding to the current value of the disappearance timer, and based on the scaling factor and the initial search range. Calculate a new search range. For example, as in the search range (1) shown in FIG. 67, when the initial search range is a square area in which the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction are 2 respectively, In some cases, the new search range is a square area having a length in the X-axis direction and a length in the Y-axis direction of 3.2 (= 2 × 1.6). Based on the search range reset in this way, the search process (the process of step S1303) for the ID is performed again. The unit of the search range length (the length in the X-axis direction and the length in the Y-axis direction) is not particularly limited, and an arbitrary unit such as cm, mm, or μm can be adopted.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1315, but this processing is the same processing as the processing of step S312 of FIG. 42, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the value of the re-search number counter is larger than 50 or whether the value of the disappearance timer is larger than a value corresponding to 200 ms (step S1316).

  If it is determined that the value of the re-search number counter is 50 or less and the value of the erasure timer is less than or equal to the value corresponding to 200 ms, the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the previous detection position (step S1317). As described in the first embodiment, the "mark" is to associate the position information of the gaming ball with the ID. In the process of step S1317, the sub CPU 201 updates the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed and the latest position information (ball position image) of the gaming ball of the ID (for example, ID (1)). The position information of the game ball included in (T2) is associated with the game ball and is continuously stored in the work RAM 203.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the re-search number counter is greater than 50 or the value of the disappearance timer is greater than the value corresponding to 200 ms, the sub CPU 201 assumes that the gaming ball has disappeared in the ball passing area. An error notification is issued (step S1318). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits an error signal indicating that an error has occurred to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that an error has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and a sound notifying that an error has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In addition, the sub CPU 201 may transmit an error signal to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall). Although not illustrated, in the process of step S1318, the sub CPU 201 ends the search for the ID (for example, ID (1)) currently being processed (see step S314 in FIG. 42). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag on in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing relating to the angle correction of the camera shooting area (step S1319). In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the CCD camera 1000 to adjust the imaging range by changing the direction of the lens. After executing the process of step S1319, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1320, but may execute this subroutine without performing the process of step S1320. Further, the sub CPU 201 performs the process of step S1318 The present subroutine may be ended without performing the process of step S1319 after

  After executing the processing of step S1306, step S1317, or step S1319, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1320. Since this processing is similar to the processing of step S315 of FIG. The explanation in is omitted. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 performs the search process (the process of step S1303) again or ends the present subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 1>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  However, normally, in pachinko gaming machines, where the gaming ball rolls at a moderate speed, in the above-described conventional techniques, it takes time for image analysis, resulting in the ever-changing gaming ball It is assumed that it becomes difficult to track the game ball continuously while grasping the position in real time.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the tracking of gaming balls.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Of a plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively photographed at a first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3) Game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image with respect to one game ball included in the first frame image, , And
The gaming ball tracking means
In the frame image, a coordinate system (coordinate system shown in FIG. 67) defined by X and Y axes orthogonal to each other is set, and the position of one game ball included in the first frame image is set to (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), while the position of the gaming ball in the second frame image is (X ₂ , Y ₂ ), a search according to _one of X ₁ and Y ₁ (FIG. 65) by performing the processing in step S1303), it is possible to identify both the values of _{X 2} and _{Y 2,}
A game machine characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in the frame image, a coordinate system (coordinate system shown in FIG. 67) defined by the X axis and Y axis orthogonal to each other is set, and the first frame image (time The position of one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1) shown in FIG. 66 (c) or the game ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66 (c)) included in the frame image photographed in T2 is (X ₁ , Y ₁ When the position of the gaming ball in the second frame image (frame image photographed at time T3) is (X ₂ , Y ₂ ), any _one of X ₁ and Y ₁ It is possible to specify the values of both X ₂ and Y ₂ by performing a search according to As described above, in the search for tracking the movement of one gaming ball, it is sufficient to refer to only one of the X-axis coordinate value and the Y-axis coordinate value, thus reducing the load on tracking processing. Can be made to facilitate tracking.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above,
One game ball in the frame image has an area corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the game ball,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, one gaming ball (for example, the gaming ball of ID (1) or the gaming ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) in the frame image is It has an area according to the value (for example, α 'or β') of the Y-axis coordinate of the gaming ball. That is, one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1) or the game ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the first frame image (the frame image captured at time T2) , And the position coordinates of the game ball in the first frame image (frame image taken at time T2) as (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), according to the value of Y ₁ (for example, α ′ or β ′) The first frame image (frame image captured at time T2) is occupied in size. Here, one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1) or the game ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) included in the first frame image (the frame image captured at time T2) as the area is large, with the game ball coordinates in the imaging timing of the first frame image (time T2) (X _{1, Y 1),} the position of the game balls in the photographing timing of the second frame image (time T3) The positional change (the movement speed of the gaming ball in the frame image) with the coordinates (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) is also considered to be large. Therefore, one of the game balls (for example, the game ball of ID (1) or the game ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66 (c)) included in the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2) If the search range is made wider as the area is larger (that is, if the search range according to the value of Y ₁ is set), the game ball in the second frame image (frame image photographed at time T3) is selected. It is assumed that it can be effectively included in the search scope. As a result, the search processing can be made more efficient, and the load on the tracking processing can be greatly reduced.

  In the third embodiment, the X axis and the Y axis are set as shown in FIG. 67. However, the X axis and the Y axis can be set arbitrarily. No matter what coordinate system is set, one game ball in a frame image (for example, the game ball of ID (1) or the game ball of ID (2) shown in FIG. 66C) has X-axis coordinates. The search range has a size corresponding to only one value (for example, α ′ or β ′) of the value of Y and the value of Y-axis coordinate, and the search range (for example, the search range shown in FIG. The search can be performed based on 1) or the search range (2). Then, if pattern matching is performed using such a search range, the amount of calculation and memory usage of the CPU can be suppressed by simply comparing the two frames and extracting a region having a large difference. You can track the ball.

<Supplementary Note 2>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, a goto act is conventionally known to try to acquire balls by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, clever fraud has frequently occurred, and it is desirable to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the gaming shop is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The inventor of the present invention detects an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine by using the technology developed by itself in the process of intensively examining the technology for tracking the gaming ball as described above, and prevents tampering or the gaming machine We came up with the idea that it could be useful for responding to problems.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(2-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down,
The game ball which has flowed down the game area can enter the ball, and a discharge area (first start port 44, second start port 45, first large) which can discharge the entered game ball to the outside of the game area The winning opening 53, the second large winning opening 54, the out opening 55 and the like),
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Of a plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively photographed at a first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3) Game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image with respect to one game ball included in the first frame image, , And
The gaming ball tracking means
The second frame image is a range based on the position of one game ball included in the first frame image, and is a range not including a predetermined search non-target area (masking area shown in FIG. 38) Search execution means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S1302 and step S1303 in FIG. 65) that executes a search for the search range set as
The game ball determined to be within the search range of the second frame image as a result of the search by the search execution means is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image Game ball identification means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S1304 in FIG. 65) to be determined;
A game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image as a result of the search by the search execution means is within the search range in the second frame image In the case where the game ball is not present in the search object exclusion area, and the one game ball included in the first frame image is not entering the discharge area, the game ball tracking means Error signal transmitting means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 1318 in FIG. 65) for transmitting an error signal indicating failure in tracking the gaming ball by
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the position of one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image captured at time T2) is referred to The search is executed for the search range which is set as the range not including the predetermined non-search target area (masking area). Then, as a result of the search, the game ball determined to be within the search range in the second frame image (frame image photographed at time T3) is the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2). It is determined that the game ball is the same as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included. On the other hand, as a result of the search, it is determined that the game ball is the same as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2). The game ball is not within the search range in the second frame image (frame image captured at time T3) and is not present in the search object exclusion area (masking area), and the first frame The one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the image (frame image taken at time T2) is a discharge area (first start port 44, second start port 45, first large) When the player does not enter the winning opening 53, the second large winning opening 54, the out opening 55, etc.), an error signal indicating that tracking of the game ball has failed is transmitted.

  The second game ball that should be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (the frame image captured at time T2) If it does not exist in the search range in the frame image (frame image taken at time T3) (if the target gaming ball can not be found in the search range), some abnormality has occurred, There is a possibility that fraudulent acts have been carried out or problems have occurred in the gaming machine. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in such a case, by transmitting an error signal, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine. it can. In addition, it is attributable to the target game ball having entered the discharge area (the first start opening 44, the second start opening 45, the first large winning opening 53, the second large winning opening 54, the out opening 55, etc.) If the game ball can not be found within the search range, an error signal is not transmitted because no abnormality has occurred. In addition, although the non-search target area (masking area) (the area set as an area where game balls are easily lost) is excluded in advance from the search range, although the game ball normally moves, such a loss of sight Due to being located in the easy area, the error signal is not transmitted even when the game ball can not be found even by accident. This makes it possible to prevent the erroneous detection of the fact that the abnormality has not occurred although the abnormality has not occurred.

  In the present specification, the “discharge area” and the “discharge area” (see FIG. 39) are different concepts. The "discharge area" has a portion (discharge port) having a structure that allows the game ball having flowed down the game area to enter the ball and a passage for discharging the ball into the outside of the game area. And the formed part of the The “area for discharge” is defined by a structure capable of causing such gaming balls to enter and discharge. On the other hand, the “discharge area” is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of one discharge area, as described with reference to FIG. The “discharge area” is set such that the entire area is included in the imaging range of the imaging device (camera). For example, after the time (for example, 4 ms) equivalent to one frame has elapsed from the time of one game, the game ball included in the shooting range at one time of time captures the shooting range by entering the discharge area. In a situation where the game ball is not included in the range, the range in which the gaming ball can exist at the one time is set as the predetermined range. That is, the predetermined range is a portion included in the shooting range of the camera in the vicinity of the discharge area, and a distance in which the game ball can move in the vicinity of the discharge area while the time corresponding to one frame elapses. Set in consideration. The distance in which the game ball can move in the vicinity of the discharge area while the time corresponding to one frame elapses varies depending on the structure of the game machine (game board), but can be determined by conducting an experiment. On the other hand, the “discharge area” is defined by the structure as described above, and has nothing to do with the shooting range of the camera, and a part thereof may be included in the shooting range, or the whole is outside the shooting range. It may be done. When a part of the discharge area is included in the imaging range, the part is a part of the discharge area and a part of the discharge area. That is, the discharge area and the discharge area may partially overlap each other. In addition, when the game ball entered the discharge area stays within the shooting range of the camera for a relatively long time (for example, the time corresponding to one frame or more) (a wide range of the discharge area is included in the shooting range of the camera In such cases, the entire drainage area may be included in the drainage area. As described above, the "discharge area" is an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of one discharge area, but the "nearby" may include the discharge area itself, and the "discharge area" is the area Part or all may be set to be included in the “area for discharge”.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above,
The search execution means is
The range different from the search range when the game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image does not exist within the search range in the second frame image Can be repeatedly executed on the second frame image as a new search range (search range reset in step S 1314 in FIG. 65),
The error signal transmission means
The error signal is transmitted when the number of repetitions of the search reaches a predetermined number.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, an error signal is transmitted when the number of repetitions of the search reaches a predetermined number. The fact that the number of repetitions of the search has reached the predetermined number means that although the search has been repeated for the predetermined number of times, the target game ball could not be found, and any abnormality It is assumed that there is a high probability of occurrence of According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, by transmitting an error signal in such a case, an abnormality can be accurately detected.

<Supplementary Note 3>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  However, in the prior art as described above, the specific method for detecting the ever-changing position of the gaming ball, the processing time for the image analysis, etc. are not considered, and the gaming ball is tracked in real time It is assumed that it will be difficult to

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of tracking a gaming ball with high accuracy.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Of a plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, two consecutive frame images are respectively photographed at a first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2) and a second frame image (time T3) Game ball tracking means (sub CPU 201 for executing the process of FIG. 65) for specifying the position in the second frame image with respect to one game ball included in the first frame image, , And
The gaming ball tracking means
First search execution means for executing a search for a predetermined range based on the position of the one game ball included in the first frame image for the second frame image (steps S1302 and S1303 in FIG. 65) The sub CPU 201) to execute
The game ball determined to be within the predetermined range in the second frame image as a result of the search by the first search execution means is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image An initial tracking unit (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S1304 in FIG. 65) that determines
A game ball to be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image as a result of the search by the first search execution means is within the predetermined range in the second frame image If not, the continuous search execution unit executes the search for the second frame image for the extended range wider than the predetermined range (step S 1314 in FIG. 65, step S 1302, and sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S 1303 )When,
The game ball determined to be within the expanded range of the second frame image as a result of the search by the continuous search execution means is the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image And a continuation tracking unit (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S1304 in FIG. 65).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in the first search, one game ball (for example, a game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (frame image captured at time T2) A search is performed on the second frame image (frame image captured at time T3) in a predetermined range based on the position of. Then, as a result of the initial search, it is determined that it is the same game ball as the one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) included in the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T2). If the gaming ball to be played does not exist within the predetermined range in the second frame image (frame image captured at time T3), the continuous search is executed for the extended range wider than the predetermined range. As a result, the predetermined range to be subjected to the initial search is set to a limited range, and the expanded range can be obtained only when the target game ball can not be found within the search range in the initial search. It becomes possible to do a search. In this respect, if the first search is performed in a wide range, it becomes easy to find the target game ball, but it becomes difficult to track the game ball as a result of an increase in processing load for the first search. turn into. On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the first search, and it is possible to track the game balls with high accuracy.

(3-2) The gaming machine according to (3-1) above,
The continuous search execution means is
A game ball that should be determined to be the same game ball as the one game ball included in the first frame image as a result of the search for the expansion range in the second frame image is within the expansion range If it does not exist, it is possible to repeatedly execute a search for the second frame image for a range wider than the extension range,
A wider range is set as the extension range as time passes as the number of repetitions of the search increases.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the search range can be expanded as needed according to the elapsed time as the number of repetitions of the continuous search increases. As a result, the search process can be made more efficient, and the load on the tracking process can be further reduced.

  In addition, if the search range is expanded without limitation, a large amount of effect LEDs and masking areas will be included in the search range and the processing load will increase. Therefore, the search range expansion is stopped with a certain size as the upper limit. It is desirable to end the tracking of the game ball. The upper limit of such a size is determined by various factors such as the operation speed of the CPU and the physical structure of the gaming machine (game board). For example, if the search range is expanded to a certain extent, it is assumed that the working memory capacity required for executing the search process is exceeded, so the search scope is wide according to the memory capacity. It is conceivable to set an upper limit on In addition, when the area of the masking region present in the search range becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value, the processing load may exceed the certain limit, and the search range may not be further expanded. As in the present embodiment, if the upper limit is set to the number of repetitions of the search, it is possible to define the upper limit of the breadth of the search range, thereby preventing the search range from being expanded without limitation. Can. However, the upper limit may not be set to the size of the search range, and the search range may be extended to the entire shooting range by the CCD camera 1000 unless the gaming ball is found. Alternatively, when a scene around the gaming machine is included in the shooting range by the CCD camera 1000, the search range is not expanded to the entire shooting range, and an area corresponding to the gaming machine is specified from the image obtained by shooting. Alternatively, the search range may be extended to the entire area corresponding to the gaming machine. Further, the area corresponding to the game board may be specified among the gaming machines (except for the game board), and the search range may be extended to the entire area corresponding to the game board.

  In the present invention, the photographing device (camera) is disposed so as to be able to photograph the game area, but the entire game area may be included in the photographing range, or only a part of the game area is photographed. It may be included in the range. In addition, areas other than the game area may be included in the shooting range, and for example, the configuration of the gaming machine other than the game area or the scenery around the gaming machine may be included in the shooting range. When the configuration of the gaming machine other than the gaming area is included in the shooting range, all the one gaming machines may be included in the shooting range, or only a part of the one gaming machine is included in the shooting range. May be

  The third embodiment has been described above. Although detailed description is omitted, also in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in order to detect the position of the game ball prior to the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 65), the difference between the front and back frames is extracted The process (refer FIGS. 33-37) which concerns is performed. However, in the third embodiment, the method for detecting the position of the gaming ball is not limited to the method described in the first embodiment, and simply difference processing is performed on each frame image and the background image. A method (background difference method) to be executed may be adopted. As the background image, it is possible to use an LED extinguished background image obtained by photographing the game board 12 in a state in which the game ball is not present in the game area 12a and in a state in which the effect LED is not lighted. In this case, the background image to be used may be appropriately selected according to the state of the effect LED at the timing of capturing each frame image. That is, the effect LED (LED 59) is controlled by the LED control circuit 207 based on the lamp request (message) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) to the LED control circuit 207 (step in FIG. 26). The sub CPU 201 can recognize the state of the effect LED based on designation information (effect information) of effect contents included in the lamp request). Thereby, when the effect LED is turned off at the photographing timing of the frame image, the LED turned off background image is selected, and when the effect LED is turned on, the LED lit background image (game in the game area 12a It is also possible to select an image obtained by photographing the game board 12 in a state in which no ball is present and in a state in which the effect LED is lit. In addition, if there is no change in the state of the effect LED between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the third frame image (time T3), use the background subtraction method. In the first embodiment, only when there is a change in the state of the effect LED between the photographing timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the photographing timing of the third frame image (time T3). As described, comparison between three frames may be performed. However, in order to effectively eliminate the influence on the image caused by the environmental change in the game board 12 including the influence of the extraneous light etc., it is desirable to always compare among the three frames. The above points apply not only to the third embodiment but also to the other embodiments.

<Modification>
In the third embodiment, the gaming medium tracking process (see FIG. 65) associates the gaming ball at time T2 (see FIG. 41A) with the gaming ball at time T3 (see FIG. 41B). It explained as processing. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 69A and 69B, more generally, the case where the game ball at time T _N is associated with the game ball at time T _{N + 1} will be described.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the case where the processing interval of the game medium tracking processing (see FIG. 65) is the same as the acquisition interval of the frame image has been described. On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the case where the processing interval of the game medium tracking processing is shorter than the acquisition interval of the frame image will be described.

<Game Media Tracking Process (Modification)>
69A and 69B are flowcharts showing gaming medium tracking processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 70 and 71 are diagrams showing an example of the case where the search range is expanded.

Game media tracking processing shown in FIG. 69A and FIG. 69B is a correspondence processing for the game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N, performed at the time T _{N + 2.} An image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T _N is written as a ball position image (T _N ), and an image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T _{N + 1} is written as a ball position image (T _{N + 1} ).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines one ID (for example, ID (1)) of all IDs currently being managed as a processing target, and at the same time, for the one ID, the game ball at time T _N It is determined whether the tracking is completed (step S1401). “The tracking of the game ball at time T _N is completed for one ID” means that the position at time T _N is specified (the mark is set) for the game ball of the ID. Do. When tracking of the game ball at time T _N is completed for one ID, position information (a plurality of balls included in the ball position image (T _N ) at time T _N of one ID and the game ball of the ID) The position information of any one of the gaming balls of the game balls is stored in association with each other in the work RAM 203 (see step S1404 and step S1413).

The tracking of the gaming ball at time T _N is completed for the ID determined as the processing target (for example, ID (1)) (the position at time T _N is specified for the gaming ball of the ID) If it is determined, the sub CPU 201 sets a search range based on the position of the gaming ball at time T _N (step S1402). The search range set here is the first search range (see FIG. 67) described in the third embodiment.

Next, the sub CPU 201 compares the position of each of the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) with the search range set in step S1402, and the plurality included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) It is determined whether there is a game ball belonging to the search range among the game balls of (step S1403).

If it is determined that there are gaming balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the detection position (step S1404) . In this process, the sub CPU 201 associates the position information of the gaming ball determined to be within the search range with the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)) to the work RAM 203. Remember.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no gaming ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1405 to step S1408 However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1307 to S1310 of FIG. 65, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  Note that after executing the process of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 may shift the process to step S1423 instead of ending the present subroutine. Thereby, as in FIG. 65, even after error notification is performed, the tracking process in this subroutine is continued for gaming balls other than the game balls that are the cause of the error notification ( See step S1424). In addition, after executing the processing of step S1408, the sub CPU 201 may release the ID of the gaming ball that has caused the error notification, but shifts the processing to step S1409 without releasing the ID. It may be As a result, the tracking process is continued in the present subroutine from the next time on the gaming ball that caused the error notification, for example, when the error notification cause disappears (the gaming ball in the masking area is out of the masking area When returning, etc., there is a possibility that the game ball can be found within the search range. Furthermore, for example, as described in the first embodiment, the movement of the gaming ball is visualized in the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the position information (see step S1404) of the gaming ball obtained as a result of the tracking process. If presentation is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which both the error notification screen and such presentation screen are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13. In addition, a video (see the eighth embodiment) may be projected on the gaming ball or the vicinity of the gaming ball using a projection device such as a projector. As a result, for example, it is possible to project an image on the gaming ball present in the masking area while performing error notification. Alternatively, projecting an image on the gaming ball instead of projecting an image on the gaming ball while performing an error notification (separately from the error notification) is the content of the error notification (processing content of step S1408) It is also good. Then, the liquid crystal display device 13 may display the effect screen instead of displaying the error notification screen. In addition, an image for error notification is projected to the game ball that caused the error notification, and an effect image is displayed for the game balls other than the game ball that caused the error notification. It may be projected. In that case, it is preferable to make the video for error notification different from the video for presentation. Thus, a versatile game machine can be provided.

If it is determined in step S1407 that no gaming ball is present in the masking area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming ball has disappeared in the search based on the position of the gaming ball at time _TN , and the ID currently being processed is And the addition of the disappearance timer (T _N ) is started (step S1409). The value of the lost timer (T _N), for ID having the current process target, the association processing for the game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N from the start of (the subroutine) It corresponds to the elapsed time (the elapsed time from time T _{N + 2} ).

Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the erasure count counter in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1410). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the loss frequency counter stored in the work RAM 203 as a new value of the loss frequency counter in the work RAM 203. Loss count is the ID having the current process target, indicates the number of times of executing this subroutine in order to perform association between game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N, a game of the ID This corresponds to the number of times this subroutine has been executed since the ball was lost. If the game ball of one ID is lost in the present subroutine performed at a certain time (if the determination result in step S1407 is NO), the number of disappearances is the number of times including the relevant subroutine as in the present embodiment. Alternatively (the counting of the number of erasures may be started from the subroutine), unlike the present embodiment, the counting of the number of erasures may be started from the next subroutine of the subroutine.

In step S1401, the tracking of the gaming ball at time T _N is not completed for the ID determined as the processing target (for example, ID (1)) (the position at time T _N is specified for the gaming ball of the ID If the sub CPU 201 determines that the ID is not the same, the sub CPU 201 sets a search range corresponding to the disappearance timer (T _K ) based on the latest ball position for which tracking has been completed for the ID (step S1411). Here, "the latest ball position where tracking has been completed" is the last one of ball positions that have been identified so far (updated as time passes) with respect to the game ball of the ID. It is the (latest) ball position. A variable K satisfying K <N is defined as “the latest ball position where tracking is completed” as “the position of the game ball at time T _K ”. In the process of step S1411, the sub CPU 201 sets a search range based on the position at time T _K of the gaming ball of the ID currently being processed. In the search range set here, the elapsed time from time T _{K +2} is larger as the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) (see steps S1409 and S1418) associated with the ID currently being processed is larger. The longer it is), the wider the range. The method for causing the search range to be wider as the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) is not particularly limited, and the search range setting table (see FIG. 68) as described in the third embodiment is used. Alternatively, the present search range may be calculated as the scaling factor for the initial search range is proportional to the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ). In addition, the search range itself may be associated with the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) instead of the scaling factor with respect to the initial search range.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there are game balls belonging to the search range set in step S1411 among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ) (step S1412). .

If it is determined that there are gaming balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 sets a mark for the detection position (step S1413). . In this process, the sub CPU 201 associates the position information of the gaming ball determined to be within the search range with the ID currently being processed (for example, ID (1)) to the work RAM 203. Remember.

Here, as an example, an example in the case of K = 1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as a premise, in FIG. 70 (a), the position of the game ball at time T ₂ (2 frame of the sphere position), the position of the game balls at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position) as a reference not included in the initial search range in a state in which the game ball is lost in the search on the basis of the position of the game ball (first frame sphere position) at time T ₁ (see step S1409). The first search is performed at time T ₃ (N = 1). Then, in FIG. 70 (b), the position of the game ball at time _{T 1} (1 frame of the sphere position) search range based on the has been extended (see step S1411), the position of the game ball at time _{T 2} (2 The ball position of the frame eye is included in the expanded search range. The expanded search is performed at time T ₄ (N = 2). Thus, the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position), can be associated with the position of the game ball (second frame sphere position) at time T ₂ (step S1413 see ).

After executing the processing of step S1413, the sub CPU 201 clears the value of the disappearance timer (T _K ) associated with the ID currently being processed, and ends the addition of the disappearance timer (T _K ). (Step S1414). Then, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of K (step S1415).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether K = N is satisfied (step S1416). If it is determined that K is not not N (that is, K <N), the sub CPU 201 repeats the processing of steps S1411 to S1416. In this case, the sub CPU 201 may return the process to step S1412, and may repeat the process of steps S1412 to S1416. In this case, after the process of step S1416 is performed, the process of setting the search range (the process of step S1411) is omitted, and the process of step S1411 performed before the process of step S1416 (previous step) The search range set in the process of S1411 will be diverted.

If it is determined that K = N, the game balls of ID to be currently processed, the position at time T _N is that specified, sub CPU201 is the position of the game ball at time T _N The search range based on is set (step S1417). Here, the sub CPU 201 may set the initial search range as in step S1402, but adopting the expanded search range (for example, the latest search range among the search ranges set in step S1411). It may be

In Figure 71, in FIG. 70 (b), by using an extended search range, the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position), the position of the game ball at time T ₂ (2 frame after correspondence between eye ball position) it is performed by using the expanded search range, the position of the game balls in time T _2, and (2 frame of the sphere position), the game balls at time T ₃ It shows that the correspondence with the position (the ball position of the third frame) is performed. In FIG. 71, the position of the game balls in time T _2, the (second frame sphere position) as a reference, but expanded search range is set, the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (1 th frame The search range may be set on the basis of the (ball position) of. Position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame of the sphere position) in the search range based, if included location of the game ball at time T ₃ (3 frame of the sphere position), the game at time T ₁ skip the correspondence between the position of the sphere (1 th frame sphere position) position of the game ball at time T _2, and (2 frame of the sphere position), the position of the game ball at time T ₁ (the first frame it is possible to perform the association between the sphere position) and the position of the game ball at time T ₃ (3 frame of the sphere position).

  In any case, after executing the processing of step S1417, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1403. As a result, search processing for the ID currently being processed proceeds.

If it is determined in step S1412 that there is no game ball belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _{K + 1} ), the sub CPU 201 determines the ID currently being processed. And the addition of the erasure timer (T _N ) is started (step S1418). Then, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the erasure count counter in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1419).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the value of the loss frequency counter is larger than a predetermined number of times (for example, 2) (step S1420). If it is determined that the value of the loss frequency counter is larger than the predetermined number, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1421 and step S1422, but these processing are similar to the processing of step S1318 and step S1319 in FIG. Since this is a process, the description here is omitted. After executing the processing of step S1422, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1420 that the value of the loss frequency counter is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, or after the processing of step S1404, step S1406, or step S1410 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines the ID currently being processed The search for (for example, ID (1)) is ended (step S1423). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the search end flag on in association with the ID (for example, ID (1)).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1424. The processing is the same as the processing of step S1320 of FIG. 65, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 performs the search process again or ends the present subroutine.

<Game Media Tracking Process (Modification)>
72A and 72B are flowcharts showing gaming medium tracking processing executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Game media tracking processing shown in FIG. 72A and FIG. 72B is a correspondence between a game ball in the game ball and the time T _N at time T _N-1, or, the game ball in the game ball and time T _{N + 1} at time T _N a process to associate, after acquiring the ball position image (T _N), a process performed until obtaining a ball position image (T N _{+ 1).} An image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T _N-1 is described as a ball position image (T _N-1 ), and an image showing the position of the gaming ball at time T _N is described as a ball position image (T _N ), An image indicating the position of the gaming ball at time T _{N + 1} is referred to as a ball position image (T _{N + 1} ).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ball position at time T _{N + 1} has been identified (step S1501). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) is obtained by the preceding and following frame difference extraction process (see step S 284 in FIG. 31). In this modification, since the processing interval of the game medium tracking process is shorter than the acquisition interval of the frame image, the game is performed from when the ball position image (T _N ) is created until the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) is created. The media tracking process is performed multiple times (for example, four times). For example, it is assumed that the processing interval of the game medium tracking processing (the processing interval of the sub control circuit main processing shown in FIG. 26) is 1⁄4 of the frame image acquisition interval. In this case, every time the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) is performed four times, the latest ball position image is created in the preceding and following frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31). For example, it is assumed that the ball position image (T _N ) is created in the inter-frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) performed at time T _{N + 1} . Then, in step S1501 of the gaming medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26), it is determined that the ball position at time T _N is identified and YES is made. become. A new ball position image is not created in the preceding and succeeding frame difference extraction process (see step S284 in FIG. 31) in the sub-control circuit main process (see FIG. 26) three times from the next time onwards. Therefore, in step S1501 of the gaming medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) in the three sub control circuit main processes (see FIG. 26), it is determined as NO. Then, further in the next (performed at time _{T N + 2)} sub-control circuit the main processing (see FIG. 26) the interframe difference extraction process before and after in (see step S284 of FIG. 31), create a sphere position image _{(T N + 1)} is Be done. Therefore, in step S1501 of the gaming medium tracking process (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 26), it is determined that the ball position at time T _{N + 1} is identified. become. Thus, when the game medium tracking process shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B is performed four times (step S1501 in FIGS. 72A and 72B is performed as the sub control circuit main process shown in FIG. 26 is performed four times). When the process of (4) is executed), the determination result of the process of step S1501 is YES only once, and the remaining 3 times are NO.

If it is determined that the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) has been obtained, is the sub CPU 201 associated with any one of all IDs currently being managed, and whether the erasure flag is set to on? It is determined whether or not it is (step S1502). The disappearance flag is set when the game ball disappears in the search based on the position of the game ball at time T _N-1 (see step S1507) when the processing according to the present subroutine is performed at time T _{N + 1} Flag (see step S1511), and is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of one gaming ball.

When it is determined that the erasure flag is set to ON in association with any one of all IDs currently being managed, the sub CPU 201 determines the value of the erasure timer corresponding to all the IDs. Is cleared and the addition of the erasure timer is ended (step S1503). Then, the sub CPU 201 sets the erasure flag corresponding to all the IDs to off (step S1504). In addition, the value of the disappearance timer is an elapsed time (elapsed time from time T _{N + 1} ) after the process (this subroutine) for correlating the game ball at time T _{N-1 with} the game ball at time T _N is started. (See step S1512).

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the erasure flags corresponding to all the IDs currently to be managed are set to OFF, or after the process of step S1504 is executed, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S1505 to step S1505. Although the process of S1510 is executed, these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1401 to S1406 of FIG. 67A, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S1509 that the deletion is not loss in the discharge area, the sub CPU 201 sets the loss flag on in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1511). The sub CPU 201 then starts adding the erasure timer in association with the ID currently being processed (step S1512).

In step S1505, the tracking of the game ball at time T _N is not completed for the ID determined as the processing target (for example, ID (1)) (the position at time T _N is specified for the game ball of the ID When it is determined that the sub CPU 201 determines that the ball position image (a ball position image (T _N-1 ), a ball position image (T _N ), a ball position image (T _{N + 1} ), etc.) of a plurality of continuous frames is determined. The position at time T _N is specified with respect to the game ball of the ID in consideration of the size, disappearance, overlap and the like of each game ball (step S1513). As described with reference to FIG. 66, in the present embodiment, the sizes of the game balls included in the ball position image are different according to the distance from the CCD camera 1000. Also, depending on the positional relationship between the gaming balls and the positional relationship between the gaming balls and the CCD camera 1000, the gaming balls may overlap on the ball position image (see FIG. 44B). Furthermore, when one game ball and another game ball completely overlap, one game ball may disappear on the ball position image. The sub CPU 201 is an ID that is currently to be processed among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _N ) based on the size of the game ball in the ball position image and the information on the overlap of the game balls. The ID is assigned to a game ball having a high probability of being a game ball (see step S 287 in FIG. 31).

If it is determined in step S1501 that the ball position image (T _{N + 1} ) is not obtained, the sub CPU 201 associates the ID with any one of all IDs currently being managed, and deletes the flag (step It is determined whether or not S1511) is set on (step S1516). If it is determined that the erasure flags corresponding to all the currently managed IDs are set to off, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the erasure flag is set to ON in association with any one of all IDs currently to be managed, the sub CPU 201 sets the erasure flag to ON. While determining one ID (for example, ID (1)) of all the existing IDs as a processing target, the timer corresponding to the disappearance timer is based on the position of the gaming ball of the one ID at time T _{N -1} A search range is set (step S1517). The search range set here becomes wider as the value of the erasure timer (see step S1512) is larger (as the elapsed time from time _{TN + 1} is longer) (see FIG. 68).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there are gaming balls belonging to the search range set in step S1517 among the plurality of gaming balls included in the ball position image (T _N ) (step S1518). .

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S1519 and step S1520. The processing is the same as the processing of step S1413 and step S1414 in FIG. 69B, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1520, the sub CPU 201 sets the erasure flag associated with the ID currently being processed to off (step S1521).

If it is determined in step S1518 that there are no game balls belonging to the search range among the plurality of game balls included in the ball position image (T _N ), or after the process of step S1521, the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the processing in step S1517 to step S1521 is completed for all the IDs for which the erasure flag is set to on (step S1522).

  If it is determined that the processing in step S1517 to step S1521 is not completed for any of the IDs for which the erasure flag is set to on, the sub CPU 201 performs step S1517 to step S1517 for the ID. The process of S1521 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing in step S1517 to step S1521 is completed for all the IDs for which the erasure flag is set to on, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

Fourth Embodiment
The first to third embodiments have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the third embodiment. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. The description of the parts in the first to third embodiments that apply to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Inter-frame difference extraction>
In the first embodiment, regarding the difference extraction between the front and rear frames (see step S284 in FIG. 31), as shown in FIG. 33, the effect LED is turned off at time T1, and the effect is produced between time T1 and time T2. The case has been described where the LED is turned on and then the lighting state of the effect LED continues over time T4. Regarding the case where the state of the effect LED changes in such a manner, the description in the first embodiment is valid also in the fourth embodiment. Below, the case where the state of production LED changes in another mode is explained.

  The following description is based on the situation shown in FIG. That is, as in the first embodiment, with the plurality of gaming balls rolling on the game area 12a, attention is paid to one game ball, and the position of the gaming ball at time T1 is indicated as the game ball 120a. The position of the gaming ball at time T2 is shown as gaming ball 120b, and the position of the gaming ball at time T3 is shown as gaming ball 120c (see FIG. 34). In addition, LED59 (effect LED) is provided in the vicinity of the game ball 120a, the game ball 120b, and the game ball 120c.

  FIG. 73 is a conceptual diagram of front-rear inter-frame difference extraction. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2). FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a process of extracting the game ball at time T2 from the AND image and the effect LED single image obtained in FIG. 74.

  As shown in FIG. 73, it is assumed that the effect LED is off at time T1, the effect LED is on between time T1 and time T2, and the effect LED is off between time T2 and time T3. .

  In this case, difference processing is first performed on the frame image captured at time T1 (the first frame image) and the frame image captured at time T2 (the second frame image). By doing this, an image (difference image (1)) corresponding to the difference between the first frame image and the second frame image is created. The method of creating the difference image (1) is as described with reference to FIG. Similar to FIG. 35, the difference image (1) includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1, the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, and the LED 59 (effect LED).

  Next, a difference process is performed on the frame image captured at time T2 (the image of the second frame) and the frame image captured at time T3 (the image of the third frame), so that the image of the second frame An image (difference image (2)) corresponding to the difference between the image of the second frame and the third frame is created. The method of creating the difference image (2) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (2) obtained here includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2, the game ball (game ball 120c) at time T3, and the LED 59 (effect LED). Because the state at time T3 is different between FIG. 33 and FIG. 73, positional information of the LED 59 (effect LED) is added to the difference image (2) shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74, a process (AND process) of taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of difference image (1) and difference image (2) is extracted. In FIG. 37, only the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 is included in the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), but in FIG. 74, the difference image is different from the difference image (1) The AND image with the image (2) includes an LED 59 (effect LED) in addition to the game ball (game ball 120 b) at time T2. As described above, since the LEDs 59 (effect LED) are mixed, the position of the gaming ball at time T2 can not be detected in the AND image.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75, an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and a difference process are performed on the effect LED single image, and the AND image and effect LED single image Create an image that corresponds to the difference in Thereby, the difference between the AND image and the effect LED single image is extracted, and the image obtained in this manner indicates the position information of the game ball (game ball 120 b) at time T2.

  Here, the effect LED single image is thresholded with respect to an image obtained by photographing the game board 12 in a state in which the game ball is not present in the game area 12 a and in a state where the effect LED is lit. Is a binary image subjected to An area corresponding to the effect LED by converting a pixel value equal to or more than the threshold value into 1 (white pixel) and converting a pixel value less than the threshold value into 0 (black pixel) by binarization (or vice versa) Only can be extracted. When shooting for obtaining a single effect LED image is performed so that only the pixel value of the area corresponding to the effect LED is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the effect LED may be lighted at maximum brightness. Thereby, the difference between the pixel value of the area corresponding to the effect LED and the pixel value of the other area becomes large, and it becomes easy to extract only the area (light spot) corresponding to the effect LED. Alternatively, when the game ball is not present in the game area 12a, and when the game board 12 is photographed with the effect LED turned on, the game ball is not present in the game area 12a, and the effect LED is not turned on. Even when the game board 12 is photographed in the state, the effect LED single image can also be obtained by taking the difference between the obtained images. Thus, at the time of shooting (at the time of reception, at the time of storage, etc.), it is decided to obtain an image including those other than the effect LED among the structures present in the game board, and from the image, the structures other than the effect LED It is possible to make what was removed the production LED single image. In addition, the effect LED single image is not limited to the image including only the effect LED, and as long as at least the effect LED is present, a structure other than the effect LED may be included. For example, even when an image including a structure present in the masking area in addition to the effect LED is used as the effect LED single image, the effect LED is displayed even when the difference with the AND image shown in FIG. 75 is taken. It can be removed from the image. Data corresponding to such an effect LED single image is stored in the program ROM 202.

  As described above, by using the effect LED single image, even if the state of the effect LED changes in the mode shown in FIG. The position of the gaming ball in can be detected.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 4>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in order to track the game ball which rolls while changing its position every moment, as its premise, the presence position of the game ball is grasped with high accuracy in each frame image constituting the moving image obtained by shooting. It is necessary to. However, in the prior art as described above, there is a problem that this point is not sufficiently studied.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the presence position of the gaming ball in the frame image with high accuracy in tracking the gaming ball. To aim.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(4-1) A game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can move and a lighting means (effect LED),
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming board;
A single illumination means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75) obtained by photographing the gaming board in a state where no gaming ball is present in the gaming area and a state where the illumination means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the gaming board;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are taken respectively at the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T1) and the second frame image (time T2) And a third difference image (a frame image taken at time T3), a first difference image (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the difference between the first and second frame images. A first difference unit that generates a difference image (1) shown in 35;
Second difference means for creating a second difference image (difference image (2) shown in FIG. 36) corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the third frame image;
By taking the logical product of the first difference image created by the first difference means and the second difference image created by the second difference means, the position of the game ball included in the second frame image is specified. Position identification means, and
The position specifying means is
The second frame image includes the lighting unit in the lighting state, and the first frame image and the third frame image include the lighting unit in the lighting off state, or the second frame image includes the lighting off When the illumination means in the state is included, and the illumination means in the lit state is included in the first frame image and the third frame image, the first difference image created by the first difference means and An AND image (an AND image shown in FIG. 74) obtained by taking a logical product with the second difference image created by the second difference means, an image stored in the illumination means single image storage means (figure The position of the game ball included in the second frame image is specified by creating an image corresponding to the difference with the effect LED single image (75).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the difference between the first frame image (frame image captured at time T1) and the second frame image (frame image captured at time T2) is supported. To the difference between the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second frame image (frame image taken at time T2) and the third frame image (frame image taken at time T3) A corresponding second difference image (difference image (2)) is created. Here, between the shooting timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the shooting timing of the second frame image (time T2), an environmental change occurs in the game board 12 in addition to a change in the position of the gaming ball In this case, the environmental change appears in the first difference image (difference image (1)). Similarly, in addition to the change in the position of the gaming ball, an environmental change occurs in the gaming board 12 between the photographing timing of the second frame image (time T2) and the photographing timing of the third frame image (time T3) In this case, the environmental change appears in the second difference image (difference image (2)). However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the appearance of such environmental change in the difference image includes the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2 It is possible to remove by taking the logical product with)). Thereby, even if such an environmental change occurs, the position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the environmental change.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, each frame image may include illumination means (effect LED) in the state of (i) or (ii) below.
(I) First frame image: unlit state, second frame image: lit state, third frame image: unlit state (ii) First frame image: lit state, second frame image: unlit state, Image of the 3rd frame: Lighting state

  That is, in the cases of (i) and (ii) above, in the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2)), the state change of the illumination means (effect LED) Since the resulting difference is included, the illumination means (effect LED also in the AND image obtained by taking the logical product of the first difference image (difference image (1)) and the second difference image (difference image (2)) ) Will remain. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, in this case, the AND image and the lighting unit single image (effect LED single image) (a game ball is not present in the game area 12a), and the lighting unit Since an image corresponding to the difference with the image obtained by photographing the game board 12 is created in a state where the (effect LED) is lit, the illumination means (effect LED) can be removed from the image It is. Thereby, even if the state of the illumination means (effect LED) changes in the above (i) or (ii) mode, the position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence thereof. it can.

  In addition, about the case where the state of effect LED changes in the aspect of said (i), it is as having demonstrated using FIGS. The same explanation applies to the case where the state of the effect LED changes in the manner of (ii) above.

Furthermore, the same explanation is valid for the case where the state of the effect LED changes in the following manner (a) or (b).
(A) 1st frame image: OFF state, 2nd frame image: ON state, 3rd frame image: ON state (The brightness of the effect LED at time T2 is different from the brightness of the effect LED at time T3)
(B) First frame image: lighted state, second frame image: lighted state, third frame image: unlit state (the brightness of the effect LED at time T1 and the brightness of the effect LED at time T2 are different)

  As the above (a), for example, at time T2 (the photographing timing of the image of the second frame), while the effect LED is lit at the maximum luminance, at time T3 (the photographing timing of the image of the third frame) When the brightness of the effect LED has decreased or, conversely, at time T2 (the timing at which the image of the second frame is taken), the effect LED is lit at a lower brightness than the maximum brightness. In (the photographing timing of the image of the third frame), there may be a case where the effect LED is lit at the maximum luminance, and the like. Similarly, as the above (b), for example, at time T1 (the photographing timing of the image of the first frame), although the effect LED is lit at a lower luminance than the maximum luminance, time T2 (the second frame) In the image shooting timing), when the effect LED is lit at the maximum brightness or conversely, the effect LED is lit at the maximum brightness at time T1 (the shooting timing of the image of the first frame) By the way, at time T2 (the photographing timing of the image of the second frame), there is a case where the luminance of the effect LED is lowered.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, even when the luminance changes while the state in which the effect LED is on continues, the influence is eliminated. While being able to grasp the position of the game ball with high precision. At that time, the pixel value of the area corresponding to the effect LED in the image, and the pixel of the area corresponding to the game ball, based on how much the luminance of the effect LED at each time is with respect to the maximum luminance. An area corresponding to the gaming ball may be extracted by performing binarization processing or the like on the value.

  In addition, whether or not to execute an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and a difference process (see FIG. 75) on the effect LED simplex image, the timing of capturing the first frame image (time T1), the shooting timing (time T2) of the image of the second frame, and the state of the effect LED at the shooting timing (time T3) of the image of the third frame It may be judged on the basis of. Specifically, the effect LED (LED 59) is controlled by the LED control circuit 207 based on the lamp request (message) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 (host control circuit) to the LED control circuit 207 (FIG. 26). The sub CPU 201 can recognize the state of the effect LED based on the designation information (effect information) of the effect contents included in the lamp request). The aspect (for example, said (i), (ii), (a), (b) that production | presentation LED is contained in AND image of difference image (1) and difference image (2) based on the said presentation information) If it is determined that the state of the effect LED has changed in such an aspect) and it is determined that the state of the effect LED has changed in such an aspect, the difference image (1) and the difference image ( A difference process (see FIG. 75) may be performed on the AND image with 2) and the effect LED single image.

  Alternatively, in the difference extraction between the preceding and following frames (refer to step S284 in FIG. 31), the difference processing (see FIG. 75) on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image is It is good not to execute uniformly. In this case, even if the effect LED is included in the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) as shown in FIG. The process proceeds as an image indicating the position of the gaming ball at time T2. Then, in the search in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42), a situation occurs in which one effect LED and one game ball existing close to the effect LED are both included in one search range. It can. When such a problem occurs in the game medium tracking process, the difference image (see FIG. 75) is executed on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) and the effect LED single image It is also good.

  Although the effect LED single image may be stored in advance in a storage device such as the program ROM 202, it may be created at a predetermined timing after the pachinko gaming machine is manufactured. For example, when the power is turned on, the effect LED single image may be created. In that case, the firing handle is turned until the shooting for obtaining the effect LED single image is completed. Even if it is, you may comprise so that discharge of a game ball may be stopped.

(4-2) A game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can move and a lighting means (effect LED),
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming board;
A single illumination means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75) obtained by photographing the gaming board in a state where no gaming ball is present in the gaming area and a state where the illumination means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the gaming board;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are taken respectively at the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T1) and the second frame image (time T2) And the third frame image (the frame image captured at time T3), the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image, A position specifying unit (a sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S284 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in the second frame image;
The position specifying means is
When the state of the illumination unit included in one frame image among the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image is different from the state of the illumination unit included in another frame image Included in the second frame image by removing the appearance of the state change of the illumination means on the image based on the image stored in the illumination means single image storage means (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 75) Identify the location of the game ball
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the image of the first frame (frame image taken at time T1), the image of the second frame (frame image taken at time T2) and the third frame When the state of the illumination means (effect LED) included in one frame image among the images (frame images taken at time T3) is different from the state of the illumination means (effect LED) included in another frame image , Lighting means single image (effect LED single image) (image obtained by photographing the game board 12 in a state where no gaming ball is present in the game area 12a and lighting means (effect LED) is turned on) , The appearance of the state change of the lighting means (rendering LED) on the image is removed. Thereby, even when the state of the illumination means (effect LED) changes between the photographing timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the photographing timing of the third frame image (time T3), The position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence.

<Inter-frame difference extraction (Modification example)>
In the fourth embodiment, a difference process is performed on the AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2), and the effect LED simplex image to display the appearance change of the effect LED in the image. The case of removal was described. In the present invention, the method of removing the appearance of the state change of the effect LED in the image is not limited to this example. Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a conceptual diagram of front-rear inter-frame difference extraction. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining an image of a second frame other than the effect LED. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining a difference image (1) from the image of the second frame other than the effect LED and the image of the first frame. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a process of obtaining a difference image (2) from the image of the second frame other than the effect LED and the image of the third frame.

  As shown in FIG. 76, it is assumed that the effect LED is off at time T1, the effect LED is on between time T1 and time T2, and the effect LED is off between time T2 and time T3. . This point is similar to FIG.

  First, an image corresponding to the difference between the image of the second frame and the effect LED single image is executed by performing difference processing on the frame image (image of the second frame) taken at time T2 and the effect LED single image. (Image of the second frame other than the effect LED) is created. It is assumed that the brightness of the effect LED at time T2 is the same (maximum brightness) as the brightness of the effect LED at the time of shooting for obtaining the effect LED single image. Thereby, the effect LED in the lighting state is removed from the image of the second frame.

  Next, difference processing is performed on the frame image (image of the first frame) taken at time T1 and the image of the second frame other than the effect LED, whereby the image of the first frame and the image other than the effect LED 2 An image (difference image (1)) corresponding to the difference from the image of the frame is created. The method of creating the difference image (1) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (1) obtained here includes position information of the game ball (game ball 120a) at time T1 and the game ball (game ball 120b) at time T2.

  Next, a difference process is performed on the second frame image other than the effect LED and the frame image (third frame image) captured at time T3, to obtain the second frame image other than the effect LED and the third frame image. An image (difference image (2)) corresponding to the difference from the image of the frame is created. The method of creating the difference image (2) is as described with reference to FIG. The difference image (2) obtained here includes position information of the gaming ball (game ball 120b) at time T2 and the gaming ball (game ball 120c) at time T3.

  Next, a process (AND process) of taking the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is performed. Thereby, the common part of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is extracted, and the image obtained in this way (an AND image of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2)) is time T2 Position information of the game ball (game ball 120b) in

  As described above, by using the effect LED single image, it is possible to set the difference image from which the effect LED is removed as the target of the logical product, and the state of the effect LED changed in the mode shown in FIG. Even in this case, it is possible to detect the position of the gaming ball at time T2 while excluding the effects of lighting and extinguishing of the effect LED.

<Supplementary Note 5>
The modification of the fourth embodiment has been described above. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(5-1) A game board (game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can move and a lighting means (effect LED),
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming board;
A single illumination means for storing an image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77) obtained by photographing the gaming board in a state where no gaming ball is present in the gaming area and a state in which the illumination means is lit. Image storage means (program ROM 202);
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the gaming board;
Of the plurality of frame images acquired by the frame image acquisition means, three consecutive frame images are taken respectively at the first frame image (frame image photographed at time T1) and the second frame image (time T2) Difference between the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image when expressed as a frame image) and a third frame image (frame image captured at time T3) Difference means for executing the process;
By taking the logical product of the difference images (the difference image (1) shown in FIG. 78 and the difference image (2) shown in FIG. 79) created based on the difference processing by the difference means, the second frame image is obtained. A position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included;
The difference means is
When any of the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image (a frame image captured at time T2) includes the illumination unit in a lit state, The difference process is executed based on the image (effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77) stored in the illumination means single image storage means.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the first frame image (frame image captured at time T1), the second frame image (frame image captured at time T2), and the third frame Images (frame images taken at time T3) are sequentially acquired. Here, if there is an environmental change in the game board 12 other than the position change of the gaming ball between the photographing timing of the first frame image (time T1) and the photographing timing of the third frame image (time T3) The environmental change will appear in the frame image. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above modification, the appearance of such environmental change on the images takes the logical product of the difference images (difference images (1) and (difference image (2)). Can be removed. Thereby, even if such an environmental change occurs, the position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the environmental change.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above modification, the first frame image (frame image captured at time T1), the second frame image (frame image captured at time T2) and the third frame When any of the frame images (the image of the second frame) out of the images (frame images taken at time T3) includes the illumination means (effect LED) in the lit state, the illumination means single image Difference processing based on (effect LED single image) (image obtained by photographing the game board 12 in a state where no gaming ball is present in the game area 12a and in a state where the illumination means (effect LED) is lit) Is executed. Thereby, since the illumination means (effect LED) can be removed from the image, it is possible to prevent the illumination means (effect LED) from being erroneously detected as a game ball. As a result, the position of the gaming ball can be grasped with high accuracy.

(5-2) The gaming machine according to (5-1) above,
The presentation control means (sub CPU201 which executes processing of step S208 in Figure 26) which controls the production which uses the aforementioned illumination expedient, is provided,
The lighting unit single image storage unit is a maximum brightness lighting image obtained by photographing the gaming board in a state where no gaming ball is present in the gaming area and a lighting unit is lit at maximum brightness ( The effect LED single image shown in FIG. 77 is stored,
The difference means is
One of the first frame image, the second frame image, and the third frame image (for example, taken at time T2) based on the effect information for controlling the effect by the effect control means. If it is determined that the illumination means included in the frame image) is lit at a predetermined luminance or higher, a difference image (effect shown in FIG. 77) corresponding to the difference between the frame image and the maximum Brightness adjustment means for creating an image of a second frame other than the LED);
A difference image (difference image (1) shown in FIG. 78 and difference image (2) shown in FIG. 79) corresponding to the difference between the difference image created by the brightness adjustment means and the frame image other than the frame image Means for generating a difference image for logical multiplication.
The position specifying means is
The position of the game ball included in the second frame image is specified by taking the logical product of the difference images using the difference image generated by the logical product object difference image generation means.
It is characterized by

  In the case where the lighting means (rendering LED) having a certain brightness or more is included in the image, there is a concern that the lighting means (rendering LED) may be erroneously detected as a game ball. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification, the first frame image (frame image captured at time T1), the second frame image (frame image captured at time T2), and three frames The illumination means (effect LED) included in any frame image (second frame image) of the eye image (frame image taken at time T3) lights up with a predetermined luminance or more (maximum luminance) If it is determined that the frame image (the second frame image) and the maximum brightness lighting image (effect LED single image) (a game ball does not exist in the game area 12a, and the lighting means (effect LED) A differential image (an image of a second frame other than the effect LED) corresponding to the difference with the image obtained by photographing the gaming board 12 is created in the state of being lit at the maximum luminance. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the brightness of the illumination means (effect LED) included in the image, and it is possible to prevent the illumination means (effect LED) from being erroneously detected as a game ball.

  In the above modification, the luminance of the effect LED at the photographing timing (time T2) of the image of the second frame is the maximum luminance, and the image of the second frame photographed at the timing and the maximum luminance lighting image (effect LED single image It has been described that the difference with. However, the luminance of the effect LED at the photographing timing (time T2) of the frame image (the second frame image) having a difference with the maximum luminance lighted image (effect LED single image) may not be the maximum luminance, and it is predetermined Or more (for example, 50% or more of the maximum luminance). Since the pixel value of the region corresponding to the effect LED included in the difference image is relatively small if it is equal to or higher than the predetermined brightness, the effect LED is removed by performing the binarization process as necessary. Is possible.

  In the above modification, after an image corresponding to the difference between the second frame image and the effect LED single image (the second frame image other than the effect LED) is created, the second frame image other than the effect LED And the difference between the image of the first frame and the image of the third frame. FIG. 80 shows still another example.

  FIG. 80 is a conceptual diagram of front and rear frame difference extraction. In this example, the state of the effect LED changes in the same manner as in FIG. The method of creating the difference image (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. On the other hand, the method of creating the difference image (2) is different from that of FIG. 76, and the difference image (2) is obtained by merely using the second frame image and the third frame image without using the effect LED single image. It is created by taking the difference of In such a method as well, if the logical product of the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) is taken, the effect LED is removed, and the influence of the on / off of the effect LED is eliminated while the game ball at time T2 is The position can be detected.

  Although not shown, after creating the difference image (1) and the difference image (2) by the same method as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 74), before creating their AND image, the difference image (1 And / or the difference image (2) is subjected to difference processing using the effect LED single image, and the logical product is taken thereafter to obtain an image from which the effect LED is removed as an AND image. be able to. As described above, in the present invention, the timing at which the difference processing is performed using the effect LED single image (the image to be subjected to the difference processing) is not particularly limited, and an image to be subjected to the difference processing may be appropriately set. It is possible to remove the effect LED.

  Moreover, although the case where the appearance to the image of the state change of presentation LED was removed was demonstrated above, it is also possible to remove the state change of objects other than presentation LED from an image, if this invention is applied. As such an object, the movable member described in the first embodiment (an object whose appearance is temporally changed by performing an operation based on a predetermined position on the game board (without changing the position)) is used. It can be mentioned. In such movable members, for example, a state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening (starting hole) (open state) and a state in which the game ball can not enter the ball or not (closed state) And the like (that perform opening and closing operations) (including electric tulip-type features and feather-shaped features). Moreover, such a movable member may be a decorative member that can be driven by drive means such as a motor or a solenoid. Even when such a drivable decorative member is provided as a movable part, it is possible to remove the change in the state of the decorative member from the image. As an example, it is assumed that the appearance of such a movable member changes as the first appearance → the second appearance → the first appearance at the photographing timing of each frame. Even in such a case, the movable member can be removed from the image by executing the difference process using the movable member single image instead of the effect LED single image. The movable member single image is, for example, a state in which the game ball is not present in the game area, and a state in which the game ball is not present in the game area when the game board is photographed with the movable member in the first appearance. And, in the case where the game board is photographed in a state where the movable member has the second appearance, the difference can be obtained by taking the difference between the obtained images. Thereby, the position of the gaming ball can be accurately grasped while eliminating the influence on the image caused by the appearance change of the movable member.

Fifth Embodiment
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to fourth embodiments is applicable also in the fifth embodiment.

<Clogged / lost detection>
In the first embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 47 has been described as the process related to the detection of clogging / disappearance (see step S288 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 81 is performed.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a process related to clogging / disappearance detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining a ball jam mark. FIG. 83 is a diagram for describing a region of ball clogging elimination detection.

  In the processing relating to the detection of clogging / loss shown in FIG. 81, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a plurality of losses occur near the same portion (step S1601). Here, "disappearing" indicates that the ID is released (see step S308 in FIG. 42 and step S352 in FIG. 47). In the process of step S1601, the sub CPU 201 determines whether release of the ID has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more within a predetermined time in the area within the predetermined range. The “region within a predetermined range” is a discharge region (see FIG. 39) or a region of disappearance detection (see FIG. 48 (b)). Although not shown, as a premise, processing similar to the processing in steps S351 to S355 in FIG. 47 (processing for setting an area for disappearance detection) is performed.

  If it is determined that the game ball can not be traced, or if the image obtained by shooting (the ball position image created in the processing for extracting the difference between the front and rear frames (see step S 284 in FIG. 31)) Is not detected (when an error is notified because the game ball is lost, for example, refer to step S1421 in FIG. 69B, etc.) and the ID is released, and the release of such an ID is It may be included in “disappearance”. Further, although not described in the first embodiment, similarly to the gaming ball, the vanishing points may be managed by associating the IDs. For example, when it is determined that the game ball of ID (1) has not moved for a certain period of time (is staying at the same position), the stopping position is set as a vanishing point and the ID (1) is tracked It is assumed that the target ID is released (see steps S351 to S353 in FIG. 47). Then, in this case, it is assumed that the erasure point is managed by the ID by associating the ID (1) with the erasure point. In such a situation, since ID (1) has already been released from the tracking target, the ID against the gaming ball (the gaming ball having passed the ejection area shown in FIG. 39) newly released to the gaming area 12a is It is assumed that (1) is assigned. Then, the vanishing point managed by the ID (1) and the gaming ball managed by the ID (1) coexist. Then, when managing a lost point by ID in this way, time information is associated. That is, in the above example, when associating the ID (1) with the lost point, time information indicating the time of that point is also associated. After that, when associating the ID (1) with the gaming ball newly released to the gaming area 12a, time information indicating the time at that time is also associated. Thereby, based on the said time information (new and old of ID), the vanishing point managed by the above ID (1) and the gaming ball managed by ID (1) are distinguished clearly be able to. In addition, when the vanishing point is managed by one ID, until the vanishing point is released (until it is deleted from the work RAM 203), the ID is applied to the gaming ball newly released to the gaming area 12a. It is possible not to assign

  If it is determined that the release of the ID has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more within a predetermined time in the area within the predetermined range, the sub CPU 201 determines that the area within the predetermined area is the discharge area (see FIG. 39). It is determined whether there is any (step S1602).

  If it is determined that the area within the predetermined range is not a discharge area, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ball is clogged and gives a clogged ball mark to the corresponding portion (step S1603). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the same process as step S357 in FIG. Further, the sub CPU 201 is based on the disappearance point set first (for example, the disappearance point corresponding to the game ball of the ID (1)) among the predetermined number or more of the disappearance points existing in the disappearance detection area. , And set the ball clogging mark (see FIG. 82 (a)). The ball clogging mark is a circle of a predetermined size centered on the vanishing point set first.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), at least a part of the predetermined number or more of the vanishing points present in the vanishing detection area belongs to the inside of the circle set as the ball jam mark. As described in the first embodiment, the setting of the vanishing point is canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed (see step S353 in FIG. 47), but the setting of the ball clogging mark is determined after the predetermined time has elapsed. Even not released. FIG. 82 (b) shows that the setting of the ball jam mark remains even after the setting of the vanishing point corresponding to the gaming ball of ID (1) is cancelled. The information indicating the ball clogging mark set in this manner is stored in the work RAM 203. In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), after the setting of the earliest (oldest) vanishing point (disappearing point corresponding to the game ball of ID (1)) is canceled, Next, an area for disappearance detection is newly set on the basis of the old disappearance point (disappearing point corresponding to the game ball of ID (2)), and the processing relating to the ball clogging determination based on the area for loss detection Step S356 and step S357) are further performed.

  After executing the processing of step S1603, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that release of the ID has not been performed a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time in an area within a predetermined range, or the area where ID release has been performed in step S1602 is a discharge area. If it is determined that there is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ball clogging mark (see FIG. 82) is set (step S1604). If it is determined that the ball clogging mark is not set, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball clogging mark is set, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming ball has passed the straight line and the far side (downward) of the gaming ball (disappearing point) in the ball clogging mark. (Step S1605). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information (see step S 304 in FIG. 42) associated with the work RAM 203 for all currently managed IDs, and game balls are present in the area of the jam elimination detection. Determine if you want to

  An example of the area for ball blockade elimination detection is shown in FIG. ID (1) to ID (3) in the figure indicate the vanishing points included in the inside of the circle (see FIG. 82A) set as the ball clogging mark. The vanishing point contained in the inside of the circle set as the ball jam mark is referred to as the ball jam target vanishing point. In the example of FIG. 83, the area for ball clogging elimination detection is an area surrounded by the ball clogging target vanishing points, the side A, the side B, and the side C (area indicated by oblique lines in the drawing). The side A is a side along a tangent at the left end of the ball clogging target disappearance point (in this example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (2)) located at the left end. The side C is a side along a tangent at the right end of the ball clogging target disappearance point (in this example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (3)) located at the right end. The side B is a side such that the distance from the center of gravity of the vanishing point (in this example, the vanishing point corresponding to ID (1)) serving as the reference of the blockage mark is D It is located below the point. The distance D is a predetermined constant value, but the value is not particularly limited, and a vanishing point (for example, a vanishing point corresponding to ID (1)) which is a reference of the ball clogging mark and an image It may be a distance to the lower end (ie, the side B may coincide with the lower side of the image). In other words, the area of ball clogging elimination detection is the range of the locus drawn when moving downward the ball clogging object disappearance point located at the left end (for example, the disappearance point corresponding to ID (2)) downward. , A range of trajectories drawn when the ball clogging target vanishing point located at the right end (for example, the vanishing point corresponding to ID (3)) is moved straight downward, and the range sandwiched by these trajectories It consists of

  In step S1605, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a game ball is present in the area based on the area for ball blockade elimination detection set in this manner. Note that, as described with reference to FIG. 66, when the gaming ball is positioned in the area on the image with a certain size, the whole of one gaming ball belongs to the area for the detection of clogging removal. In addition, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball is present in the area of ball clogging elimination detection. FIG. 83 shows that the game ball of ID (X) is present in the area where ball jam elimination is detected.

  If it is determined that the gaming ball is present in the area of the ball clogging elimination detection, the sub CPU 201 determines that the ball clogging is eliminated, and deletes the ball clogging mark of the corresponding portion (step S1606). In this process, the sub CPU 201 clears the ball jam mark set in step S1603.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that no gaming ball is present in the area for detecting clogging of the ball, or after the process of step S1606 is executed, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 6>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  The present inventor has developed a technology for detecting the movement trajectory of the gaming ball when the movement trajectory of the gaming ball is abnormal, in the process of intensively examining the technology for tracking the gaming ball as described above. Detecting such an abnormality is useful for appropriately coping with the cause of the abnormality.

  And when adopting a technology to detect such an abnormality, once an abnormality is detected, it is meaningless to trace the game ball drawing an abnormal trajectory any more, so the tracking of the game ball is interrupted once It is possible to do. However, if the tracking of the gaming ball is not resumed even though the abnormality is eliminated and the movement trajectory of the gaming ball is normal, the accuracy of the tracking will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of tracking a gaming ball with high accuracy.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment has the following features.

(6-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 and step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
A retention phenomenon recognition unit that recognizes that a retention phenomenon in which the one gaming ball stays at the same position has occurred when the position of one gaming ball has not changed over a predetermined number of consecutive frame images (FIG. 47 The sub CPU 201) which executes the processing of step S351 to step S353 of
When it is recognized by the stopping phenomenon recognition means that the stopping phenomenon recognition means has generated one playing ball, the predetermined range (FIG. 48 (b) shows the disappearance detection based on the position in the frame image of the one playing ball Within the above-mentioned predetermined range, when it is recognized that the retention phenomenon has occurred by the retention phenomenon recognition means also for N (N is an integer) or more gaming balls other than the one gaming ball. Clogged event recognition means (the sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S354 to step S357 in FIG. 47) that recognizes that the clogged phenomenon in which the stationing phenomenon is repeated occurs.
After the clogging phenomenon recognition means recognizes that the clogging phenomenon has occurred, the position of the gaming ball specified by the position specifying means may exist in the state where the clogging phenomenon occurs. When it is determined that the area is determined as a difficult or impossible area, that is, an area for clogging elimination determination (for example, a sphere clogging elimination detection area shown in FIG. 83) set according to the position where the clogging phenomenon occurs. Clogging elimination recognition means (the sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S1605 and step S1606 of FIG. 81) that recognizes that the clogging phenomenon has been eliminated;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the case where clogging (ball clogging) occurs due to stacking of gaming balls, it is necessary for the game shop to appropriately cope with the cause of such clogging (abnormality). Here, in the case where such clogging (ball clogging) has occurred, it is considered that a retention phenomenon in which one gaming ball stays at the same position has occurred. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, when the position of one gaming ball has not changed over a predetermined number of continuous frame images, the phenomenon of retention of the one gaming ball It is recognized that ("disappeared") has occurred. And within a predetermined range (area of disappearance detection) based on the position in the frame image of the one game ball, the retention phenomenon is also maintained for N (for example, two) or more game balls other than the one game ball. If it is recognized that ("disappeared") has occurred, it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred. Thus, it is possible to detect occurrence of clogging (ball clogging) by stacking gaming balls together, and it is possible to obtain an opportunity to eliminate a problem caused by clogging (ball clogging).

  In the pachinko game in particular, the ball clogging phenomenon called "grape" is known. "Grapes" are generated when a plurality of gaming balls are stacked between nails and are called in this way because lumps of grape bunches are formed. Although "grapes" may occur naturally during the game, a malicious player may intentionally produce "grapes" by using a magnet. With regard to the latter, it is known as a fraudulent act (so-called "grape goto") that attempts to guide game balls to a starting area etc. by utilizing "grapes" and acquire balls, and is alert. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to detect that such a "grape" has occurred, and to prevent in advance that the "grape goto" is performed it can.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, after it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred, a state in which the position of the gaming ball is such a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred In the case where it is determined that the game ball belongs to the area for clogging elimination determination (the area for ball clogging elimination detection) set as the area where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to exist, the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has been eliminated It is recognized as As a result, even if the tracking of the gaming ball is interrupted due to the occurrence of the clogging (abnormality), the tracking can be resumed promptly if the clogging (abnormality) is resolved. The accuracy of tracking can be prevented from decreasing.

<Clogged / disappeared detection (modification)>
In the first embodiment, when at least one of the following (i) and (ii) conditions is satisfied, it is described that it is determined that ball clogging has occurred.
(I) The phenomenon (disappearance) that the position of the gaming ball does not change over a predetermined time occurs within a predetermined area a predetermined number of times or more (ii) the position of one gaming ball and the position of another gaming ball Overlap on the image (overlap) occurs within a predetermined area a predetermined number or more

  In the fifth embodiment, only the condition (i) is described, but in the present invention, the condition (i) or the condition (ii) is used as a condition for determining that the ball clogging has occurred. It may be adopted alone, or both of the above conditions (i) and (ii) may be used in combination. Hereinafter, as a modification, the case where both the conditions of the above (i) and the above (ii) are used in combination will be described.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a process related to clogging / disappearance detection executed in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing processing relating to clogging elimination detection executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 86 is a diagram for describing an area of ball clogging elimination detection.

  In the processing relating to the detection of clogging and disappearance shown in FIG. 84, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S2351 to step S2353, but these processing are similar to the processing of step S351 to step S353 of FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2351 that there is no gaming ball which has not moved for a predetermined time or after executing the processing of step S2353, sub CPU 201 determines whether the clogging flag is set to ON (step S2354). The clogging flag is a flag indicating that ball clogging has occurred (see step S2360 and step S2366).

  If it is determined that the clogging flag is not set on, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S2355 to step S2357, but these processing is similar to the processing of step S354 to step S356 of FIG. Since there is, the explanation here is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2357 that a predetermined number (for example, three) or more vanishing points exist in the vanishing detection area set in step S2356, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification (step S2358). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam occurrence signal indicating that a ball jam has occurred to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the ball clogging has occurred is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and a sound notifying that the ball clogging has occurred is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam occurrence signal indicating that a ball jam has occurred, to a hall computer that manages a pachinko gaming machine in a hall (game hall).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 starts the addition of the re-informing timer (step S2359). The value of the re-informing timer corresponds to the elapsed time after it is determined that ball clogging has occurred, and is used when error notification is performed again (see step S2404 in FIG. 85). Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 sets the clogging flag to ON (step S2360), and the present subroutine ends.

If it is determined in step S2355 that the lost points are set less than a predetermined number (for example, three), the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a game ball overlapping with another game ball (step S2361). In this process, the sub CPU 201 overlaps game balls on the ball position image obtained by the front / back frame difference extraction process (see step S 284 in FIG. 31) as in step S 358 in FIG. c) Determine whether or not the occurrence of c) has occurred. As described above, the position of the gaming ball in the ball position image is determined by the position coordinate (the value of the X-axis coordinate and the value of the Y-axis coordinate) of the center of gravity of the gaming ball on the XY rectangular coordinate plane (see FIG. 67). expressed. And, in the ball position image, the gaming ball is a circle having a certain size, and the center of the circle coincides with the center of gravity. Here, for one game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (1)) and the other game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (2)), the position of the center (center of gravity) is respectively (X ₁ , Y ₁₎ and a _(X 2, _{Y 2),} a radius, respectively, and _{r 1} and _{r 2.} If the distance between (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) is shorter than the sum of the radii of the two circles corresponding to these gaming balls (r ₁ + r ₂ ), then these two games The spheres will overlap. Does the sub CPU 201 thus generate an overlap between these two game balls by comparing the magnitude relationship between the distance between the centers of the circles corresponding to the two game balls and the sum of the radii? It can be determined whether or not.

Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether an overlap is generated between two game balls as follows. Here, the game ball (radius r ₁ ) of ID ( ₁ ) and the game ball (radius r ₂ ) of ID (2) are arranged side by side, and the game ball of ID (1) is ID (2) It is assumed that it is located on the left side of the game ball of. And the value of the X coordinate of the left end of the game ball of ID (1) is X1, the value of the X coordinate of the right end is X2, and the value of the X coordinate of the left end of the game ball of ID (2) is X3 The value of the X coordinate of the part is X4. If the game ball overlap of ID (1) game ball and ID (2) is, X1 relationships and that <X3 <X2 <X4, the relationship _{X4-X1 <(r 1 +} r 2) × 2 It will be established. Similarly, the game ball of ID (1) (radius r ₁ ) and the game ball of ID (2) (radius r ₂ ) are vertically arranged, and the game ball of ID (1) is ID (2) It is assumed that it is located above the game ball of. And let the Y coordinate value of the upper end of ID (1) game ball be Y1, the Y coordinate value of the lower end be Y2, the Y coordinate value of the upper end of ID (2) game ball Y3, the lower end The value of the Y coordinate of the part is Y4. If the ID (1) and the game ball game ball and ID (2) of the overlap is, Y1 <Y3 relationships and that <Y2 <Y4, the relationship _{Y4-Y1 <(r 1 +} r 2) × 2 It will be established. The sub CPU 201 may determine the success or failure of the relationship as described above in determining whether or not an overlap occurs between the two game balls. In the above, the case where the position of the gaming ball is represented by two-dimensional coordinates has been described, but as described above, it is also possible to represent the position of the gaming ball by three-dimensional coordinates. Similarly, it can be determined whether or not an overlap has occurred between two gaming balls.

  If it is determined in step S2361 that overlapping of gaming balls is occurring, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S2362 and step S2363, but these processing is the processing of step S359 and step S360 of FIG. It is the same process. Substep S2363 will be supplemented with respect to the point not described in step S360 of FIG. 47. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs each overlap (one game ball (for example, ID (1)) based on the processing result of step S2361. The position coordinate of the overlapping portion is specified for the overlapping portion of the game ball of another and the other game ball (for example, the game ball of ID (2)), and the area of the position coordinate is the area of overlap detection set in step S2362. Determine if it exists inside. Then, the sub CPU 201 counts the number of overlaps (overlapping portions) present in the overlap detection area, and determines whether the counted number is a predetermined number or more.

  If it is determined in step S2363 that the number of overlaps (overlapping portions) present in the overlap detection area set in step S2362 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, five), sub CPU 201 proceeds to steps S2364 to S2366. Although the process of (1) is executed, these processes are similar to the processes of steps S2358 to S2360, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2354 that the clogging flag is set to on, the sub CPU 201 executes processing relating to clogging elimination detection (step S2367), and ends this subroutine. Hereinafter, processing relating to clogging elimination detection will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the processing relating to the clogging elimination detection, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not gaming balls are present in the area of the ball clogging elimination detection (step S2401). Although the area shown in FIG. 83 can be adopted as the area for ball blockade detection, another example of the area for ball blockage elimination detection will be described here using FIG.

  In FIG. 86 (a), "the phenomenon that the position of the gaming ball does not change for a predetermined time (disappearance) occurs a predetermined number of times or more in a predetermined area" (condition of (i) above) is satisfied. This indicates that the area of ball clogging elimination detection used when it is determined that a ball clogging has occurred (when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2360 in FIG. 84). In FIG. 86 (b), "the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap on the image (overlap) occurs within a predetermined area by a predetermined number or more" (above (ii) In the case where it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred (when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2366 in FIG. 84), the region of the ball clogging elimination detection used is shown.

  The area for the ball clogging elimination detection shown in FIG. 86 (a) is an area surrounded by the ball clogging target vanishing points, the side A, the side B, and the side C (the area shown by oblique lines and hatching in the figure). ). The ball clogging target disappearance point here refers to the disappearance point existing in the area of the disappearance detection (see FIG. 48 (b)). The loss detection area has a rectangular shape, and the side A is on the same straight line as the left side of the loss detection area (rectangle), and the side C is the right side of the loss detection area (rectangle) It is on the same straight line. The side B is a side such that the distance from the center of gravity of the vanishing point serving as the reference of the vanishing detection area is D, and is located below the vanishing point for each clogging target. The side B is the same as the area for ball clogging elimination detection shown in FIG. The area shown by hatching in FIG. 86 (a) is a portion where the area of disappearance detection and the area of ball clogging elimination detection overlap.

  The area shown in FIG. 86 (b) is an area surrounded by each ball clog target game ball, side A, side B and side C (area shown by hatching and hatching in the figure) ). Each ball jam target game ball in this case indicates a game ball having an overlap (overlapping portion with another game ball) in the overlap detection area (see FIG. 48C). The overlap detection area has a rectangular shape, and the side A is on the same straight line as the left side of the overlap detection area (rectangle), and the side C is the right side of the overlap detection area (rectangle) It is on the same straight line. The side B is a side such that the distance from the center of gravity of the gaming ball, which is the reference of the overlapping detection area, is D, and is located below each ball clogging target gaming ball. The side B is the same as the area for ball clogging elimination detection shown in FIG. The area shown by hatching in FIG. 86 (b) is a portion where the area of overlap detection and the area of ball jam elimination detection overlap.

  In the process of step S2401 of FIG. 85, when the clogging flag is set to ON in step S2360 of FIG. 84, the sub CPU 201 has gaming balls in the area of the ball clogging elimination detection shown in FIG. 86 (a). If it is determined in step S2366 in FIG. 84 that the clogged flag is set to ON, it is determined whether a gaming ball is present in the area for the detection of clogged jam shown in FIG. 86 (b). . FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b) show that the gaming ball of ID (X) is present in the area for detection of clogging.

  If it is determined that the gaming ball is present in the area of the ball clogging elimination detection, the sub CPU 201 notifies that the ball clogging has been eliminated (step S2402). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam elimination signal indicating that the ball jam has been eliminated to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the ball clogging has been eliminated is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and a sound notifying that the ball clogging has been eliminated is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam elimination signal indicating that the ball jam has been eliminated, to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall).

  Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 sets the clogging flag to off (step S2403). Although not shown, the process relating to the tracking of the game balls (see steps S284 to S287 in FIG. 31) is executed on the condition that the clogging flag is set to off. Therefore, the tracking of the gaming ball is interrupted by setting the clogging flag on in step S2360 or step S2366 in FIG. 84, and resumed by setting the clogging flag in step S2403 in FIG. become. After executing the processing of step S 2403, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that no gaming ball is present in the area of ball jam elimination detection, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the re-informing timer (see step S2359 and step S2365 in FIG. 84) is a predetermined value or more Is determined (step S2404).

  If it is determined that the value of the re-informing timer is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the sub CPU 201 performs error notification again (step S2405). As described above, the value of the re-informing timer corresponds to the elapsed time after it is determined that ball clogging has occurred, and the fact that the value of the re-informing timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined value means that the ball is clogged. It means that the condition which has occurred has continued for a fixed time or more.

  In the process of step S2405, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam continuation signal indicating that the ball jam is continuing to the display control circuit 205 and the sound control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the ball clogging continues is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, and a sound notifying that the ball clogging continues is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a ball jam continuation signal indicating that the ball jam is continuing to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall). As a result, the store clerk or the like in the hall can be warned of the continuing clogging of the ball, and a warning can be issued about the situation in which it may be carried out. it can.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that the value of the re-informing timer is less than the predetermined value, or after the process of step S2405 is executed, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  Heretofore, the modification of the fifth embodiment has been described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(6-2) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 executing steps S284 and S286 of FIG. 31) for specifying the positions of a plurality of gaming balls included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
When the positions of the plurality of gaming balls included in the frame image are specified by the position specifying means, the positions of the one gaming ball and the positions of the other gaming balls are overlapped with each other. Overlapping phenomenon recognition means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S358 in FIG. 47) that recognizes that an overlapping phenomenon occurs with the other game balls;
When it is recognized by the overlapping phenomenon recognition means that the overlapping phenomenon occurs between one gaming ball and another gaming ball, a predetermined range based on the position in the frame image of the one gaming ball In the (overlap detection area shown in FIG. 48 (c)), M (M is an integer) or more overlapping phenomena other than the overlapping phenomenon between the one game ball and the other game ball Clogging phenomenon recognition means (step S359 to FIG. 47) which recognizes that clogging phenomenon occurs in which a plurality of the overlapping phenomena occur within the predetermined range when the overlapping phenomenon recognizing means recognizes the occurrence of A sub CPU 201) that executes the processing of step S361;
After the clogging phenomenon recognition means recognizes that the clogging phenomenon has occurred, the position of the gaming ball specified by the position specifying means may exist in the state where the clogging phenomenon occurs. When it is determined that the difficult or impossible area belongs to the area for clogging elimination determination (area of ball clogging elimination detection shown in FIG. 86 (b)) set according to the position where the clogging phenomenon occurs C) clogging elimination recognition means (sub-CPU 201 executing the processing of FIG. 85) for recognizing that the clogging phenomenon has been eliminated;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the case where clogging (ball clogging) occurs due to stacking of gaming balls, it is necessary for the game shop to appropriately cope with the cause of such clogging (abnormality). Here, when such clogging (ball clogging) has occurred, it is considered that an overlapping phenomenon in which one game ball and another game ball overlap on the image has occurred. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification, when the position of one game ball and the position of another game ball overlap in the image, the one game ball and the other game It is recognized that an overlap phenomenon ("overlap") occurs with the sphere. And, within a predetermined range (area of overlap detection) based on the position in the frame image of the one game ball, an overlap phenomenon ("overlap") between the one game ball and the other game ball If it is recognized that M (for example, 4) or more overlapping phenomena ("overlap") have occurred in addition to the above, it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred. Thus, it is possible to detect occurrence of clogging (ball clogging) by stacking gaming balls together, and it is possible to obtain an opportunity to eliminate a problem caused by clogging (ball clogging).

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above modification, after it is recognized that a clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) has occurred, the position of the gaming ball is in a state where the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) is occurring. If it is determined that the game ball belongs to an area for elimination of clogging determination (an area for elimination of ball clogging detection) set as an area where it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to exist, the clogging phenomenon (ball clogging) is eliminated Be recognized. As a result, even if the tracking of the gaming ball is interrupted due to the occurrence of the clogging (abnormality), the tracking can be resumed promptly if the clogging (abnormality) is resolved. The accuracy of tracking can be prevented from decreasing.

Sixth Embodiment
The first to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to fifth embodiments is applicable also in the sixth embodiment.

<Camera image analysis processing>
In the first embodiment, the process illustrated in FIG. 31 has been described as the camera image analysis process (see step S261 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 87 is performed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing camera image analysis processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the camera image analysis process shown in FIG. 87, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the processes of steps S3001 to S3006, but these processes are similar to the processes of steps S281 to S286 of FIG. , The explanation here is omitted.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes processing relating to the error determination related to ball movement (step S3007). The process related to the error determination related to the ball movement will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S3008 and step S3009. The processing is the same as the processing of step S287 and step S288 of FIG. 31, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

<Error judgment on ball movement>
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing processing relating to an error determination regarding ball movement executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the movement distance of the game ball.

In the process related to the error determination related to the ball movement shown in FIG. 88, first, the sub CPU 201 detects the movement distance of each gaming ball (step S3101). Here, as described in the third embodiment, assuming that the current time is time _{TN + 2} , the position information (latest position information) at time _{TN + 1} is stored in the work RAM 203 for the gaming ball of each ID. (See step S1404 in FIG. 69A). In addition, it is assumed that not only the latest position information but also position information for the latest predetermined number of frames is held in the work RAM 203. In the process of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 refers to the position information associated with the work RAM 203 for all currently managed IDs, and determines the latest position information (the position of the game ball at time T _{N + 1} ) and A time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame elapses based on position information (position of gaming ball at time T _{N + 1-K} ) by a time corresponding to a number (= K, for example, 1) frame Calculate the distance the game ball has moved between.

As described in the third embodiment, when the coordinate system (see FIG. 67) defined by the X axis and the Y axis in the ball position image is set, the position information of the gaming ball is the value of the X axis coordinate and the Y axis coordinate It is expressed by the value of Here, for the game ball of ID (1), the position at time T _{N + 1 -K} is represented as (X ₁ , Y ₁ ), and the position of the game ball at time T _{N +1} is represented as (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) Do. On the other hand, as described in the third embodiment, the size of the game ball included in the ball position image depends on the position of the game ball (the distance of the distance from the CCD camera 1000, ie, the value of Y axis coordinate). (See FIG. 66). Therefore, the distance between (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image does not match the distance the game ball actually moved on the game board 12 (game area 12 a) Become.

Therefore, in the process of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 converts position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image into position coordinates in the game area 12a. As described in the third embodiment, since the game area 12a is formed on a two-dimensional plane, setting the coordinate system (see FIG. 89) defined by the x-axis and y-axis in the two-dimensional plane, The position of the gaming ball in the gaming area 12a is represented by the value of the x-axis coordinate and the value of the y-axis coordinate. Position coordinates in the ball position image and position coordinates in the game area 12a correspond one to one, and position coordinates in the game area 12a corresponding to position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) in the ball position image are (x ₁ , Y ₁ ), and position coordinates in the game area 12 a corresponding to position coordinates (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image are (x ₂ , y ₂ ). The sub CPU 201 determines the position coordinates (X ₁ , Y ₁ ) and (X ₂ , Y ₂ ) in the ball position image based on the predetermined function, respectively, the position coordinates (x ₁ , y ₁ ) in the game area 12 a and Convert to (x ₂ , y ₂ ). Then, the sub CPU 201 calculates the distance between (x ₁ , y ₁ ) and (x ₂ , y ₂ ) based on the position coordinates after conversion. (X ₁ , y ₁ ) indicates the position where the game ball actually exists in the game area 12 a at time T _{N + 1 -K} , and (x ₂ , y ₂ ) indicates the game at time T _{N + 1} It shows the position where the gaming ball actually exists in the area 12a. Therefore, for the distance between (x ₁ , y ₁ ) and (x ₂ , y ₂ ), a time corresponding to (K (for example, 1) frame elapses from time T _{N + 1 -K} to time T _{N + 1} In the meantime, it shows the distance the game ball has actually moved. The sub CPU 201 calculates such a movement distance for the game balls of all the IDs currently managed.

In FIG. 89, as an example in the case of K = 1, when the coordinate system defined by the x axis and the y axis is set in the two-dimensional plane on which the game area 12a is formed, the game ball of ID (1) is time (X ₁ , y ₁ ) (while the time corresponding to one frame elapses) from T _N (the photographing timing of the first frame image) to time T _{N + 1} (the photographing timing of the second frame image) It shows a state of moving from)) to (x ₂ , y ₂ ). The moving distance of the gaming ball in this case is also shown.

  After executing the processing of step S3101, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a movement distance calculated for the gaming ball of each ID that exceeds a predetermined distance (step S3102). The predetermined distance is a distance by which the game ball can move in a time corresponding to K (for example, 1) frame, and is preset according to the structure of the game board 12 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The predetermined distance may be determined by conducting an experiment in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  If it is determined that there is a gaming ball whose moving distance exceeds a predetermined distance, the sub CPU 201 gives an error notification (step S3103). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a long distance movement occurrence signal indicating that the movement distance of the gaming ball has exceeded a predetermined distance to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. Thereby, an image notifying that the moving distance of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined distance is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound notifying that the moving distance of the game ball has exceeded the predetermined distance is the speaker 11 Output from Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits a long distance movement occurrence signal indicating that the movement distance of the gaming ball has exceeded a predetermined distance to the hall computer managing the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (gaming hall).

If it is determined in step S3102 that there is no gaming ball whose moving distance exceeds the predetermined distance, or after the process of step S3103 is executed, the sub CPU 201 detects the moving speed of each gaming ball (step S3104). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 calculates the movement speed of the game ball of each ID from time T _{N + 1 -K} to time T _{N + 1} based on the position coordinates (position coordinates in the gaming area 12a) converted in step S3101. Do. The velocity has a component in the x-axis direction and a component in the y-axis direction. The component in the x-axis direction is obtained by dividing the displacement in the x-axis direction (x ₁ → x ₂ ) by the time required for the displacement (for example, a time corresponding to 1 frame). The component in the y-axis direction is obtained by dividing the displacement in the y-axis direction (y ₁ → y ₂ ) by the time required for the displacement (for example, a time corresponding to one frame).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the movement speed calculated for the game balls of the respective IDs exceeds a predetermined speed (step S3105). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for each ID, whether or not the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity calculated in step S3104 are outside the predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction and the predetermined range for the component in the y-axis direction are set separately. The predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction is referred to as the x-axis direction allowable velocity range, and the predetermined range for the component in the y-axis direction is referred to as the y-axial direction allowable velocity range. The x-axis direction speed tolerance is the range of possible values of the x-axis direction component of the speed (range from lower limit to upper limit), and the y-axis direction speed tolerance is the y-axis direction component of the speed It is a range of values to be obtained (range of lower limit value to upper limit value). These ranges are preset according to the structure etc. of the game board 12 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. These ranges may be determined by conducting experiments in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the process of step S3105, if at least one of the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity calculated in step S3104 for at least one ID of the sub CPU 201 is out of the allowable range. It is determined that there are gaming balls whose moving speed exceeds a predetermined speed.

  If it is determined that there is a gaming ball whose moving speed exceeds the predetermined speed, the sub CPU 201 gives an error notification (step S3106). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits a high speed movement occurrence signal indicating that the movement speed of the gaming ball has exceeded a predetermined speed to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206. Thereby, an image notifying that the moving speed of the gaming ball has exceeded the predetermined speed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or a sound notifying that the moving speed of the gaming ball exceeds the predetermined speed is the speaker 11 Output from In addition, the sub CPU 201 transmits a high-speed movement occurrence signal indicating that the moving speed of the game ball has exceeded a predetermined speed to a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines in a hall (game hall).

  If it is determined in step S3105 that there is no gaming ball whose moving speed exceeds the predetermined speed, or after the process of step S3106 is executed, the sub CPU 201 detects the acceleration of each gaming ball (step S3107). . Every time this subroutine is executed once, the sub CPU 201 calculates the moving speed of the gaming ball in the time corresponding to the latest K (for example, 1) frame in the processing of step S3104. The movement speed of the game ball calculated each time this subroutine is executed is cumulatively stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the ID of the game ball. Therefore, the speed cumulatively stored in the work RAM 203 indicates the transition of the speed of each gaming ball, and the sub CPU 201 can recognize the relationship between the passage of time and the change in speed. Thus, the sub CPU 201 can calculate the acceleration of each gaming ball by obtaining the amount of change in speed per unit time. Similar to the velocity, the acceleration also has a component in the x-axis direction and a component in the y-axis direction.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the acceleration calculated for the game ball of each ID exceeds a predetermined acceleration (step S3108). In this process, for each ID, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the acceleration calculated in step S3107 are outside the predetermined range. In the present embodiment, the predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction and the predetermined range for the component in the y-axis direction are set separately. The predetermined range for the component in the x-axis direction is referred to as an x-axis direction acceleration allowable range, and the predetermined range for the y-axis direction component is referred to as a y-axis direction acceleration allowable range. The allowable range of acceleration in the x-axis direction is the range of possible values of the component of the x-axis direction of acceleration (range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value), and the allowable range of acceleration in the y-axis direction is the value of the y-axis direction component of acceleration. It is a range of values to be obtained (range of lower limit value to upper limit value). These ranges can be determined by conducting experiments in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but since the y-axis direction coincides with the vertical direction (downward), gravity greatly affects the y-axis direction acceleration allowable range. It will be. In the process of step S3108, if at least one of the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction of the acceleration calculated in step S3107 for the at least one ID is out of the allowable range, the sub CPU 201 It is determined that there is a game ball exceeding a predetermined acceleration. The game ball rolls while colliding with various structures (nails and the like) provided on the game board 12, and the y-axis direction acceleration immediately after colliding with these structures is a large minus (vertically upward) Value) (value outside the allowable range). Therefore, it is desirable to exclude such y-axis direction acceleration from the determination target. When the gaming ball collides with such a structure, the sub CPU 201 changes the component of the velocity in the y-axis direction from a positive value to a negative value, so that the sub CPU 201 is based on the component in the y-axis direction of velocity. It is possible to recognize that the gaming ball has collided with the structure, and the change in y-axis direction acceleration accompanying it can be excluded from the judgment.

  If it is determined that there is a game ball exceeding a predetermined acceleration, the sub CPU 201 gives an error notification (step S3109). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits an abnormal acceleration occurrence signal indicating that the acceleration is abnormal to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. As a result, an image notifying that the acceleration has become abnormal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or a sound notifying that the acceleration becomes abnormal is output from the speaker 11. Further, the sub CPU 201 transmits an abnormal acceleration occurrence signal indicating that the acceleration has become abnormal, to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall).

If it is determined in step S3108 that there is no gaming ball exceeding the predetermined acceleration, or after the process of step S3109 is executed, the sub CPU 201 detects the moving direction of each gaming ball (step S3110). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the moving direction of each gaming ball is downward in the vertical direction or upward in the vertical direction. Specifically, based on the position coordinates (position coordinates in the game area 12a) converted in step S3101, the sub CPU 201 determines the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1 -K} for the game ball of each ID (FIG. 89). in the example shown, a _{y 1),} in the example shown in y-axis coordinate values (Figure 89 position at the time _{T N + 1,} compares the _{y 2)} and. The value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1} (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) is the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1-K} (y _{1 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) If the size is also large, it is determined that the moving direction of the gaming ball of the ID is vertically downward. Conversely, the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1} (y _{2 in the} example shown in FIG. 89) is the value of the y-axis coordinate of the position at time T _{N + 1 -K} (y in the example shown in FIG. If it is smaller than ₁ ), it is determined that the moving direction of the gaming ball of the ID is vertically upward. The method for determining whether the movement direction of the game ball is vertically downward or vertically upward is not limited to this method. For example, position coordinates converted in step S3101 (position coordinates in the game area 12a ), But using the position coordinates before conversion (position coordinates in the ball position image) as it is, the Y-axis coordinate value of the position of the gaming ball at time T _{N + 1-K} and Y of the position of the gaming ball at time T _{N +1} The values of axis coordinates may be compared. If the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity calculated in step S3104 is a positive value, it is determined that the moving direction of the gaming ball is vertically downward, and the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity is a negative value. If so, it may be determined that the moving direction of the gaming ball is vertically upward.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (step S3111). In this process, if the moving direction of any of the gaming balls is upward in the vertical direction, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a gaming ball whose movement direction is abnormal. In addition, immediately after the game ball is released from the ball outlet 41d to the game area 12a (immediately after passing through the ejection area shown in FIG. 39), the game ball has a vertically upward velocity component It is normal that the movement direction of the gaming ball is vertically upward. Therefore, it is desirable that the game balls for which a predetermined time has not passed after passing through the ejection area (after being assigned an ID) are not subject to this processing.

  If it is determined that there is a game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction), the sub CPU 201 gives an error notification (step S3112). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits, to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206, a backflow generation signal indicating that the moving direction of the gaming ball is upward in the vertical direction. Thereby, an image notifying that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or a sound notifying that the moving direction of the game ball is upward in the vertical direction is output from the speaker 11 Be done. In addition, the sub CPU 201 transmits a backflow occurrence signal indicating that the moving direction of the gaming ball is upward in the vertical direction to the hall computer that manages the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall). In addition, when the game ball collides with a structure (nail, etc.), the movement direction of the game ball can be temporarily upward in the vertical direction, so the movement direction of the game ball is only once upward in the vertical direction. The error notification may be performed for the first time when the number of times the movement direction of the gaming ball has become vertically upward (the number of backflows) reaches a specific number (see step S3114) without performing the error notification.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the backflow frequency counter in association with the ID of the game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction) (step S3113). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the backflow frequency counter stored in the work RAM 203 as a new value of the backflow frequency counter in the work RAM 203. The number of backflows indicates the number of times the moving direction of the game ball of the ID has been moved upward in the vertical direction. Note that, for the gaming ball of which the moving direction is determined to be vertically downward in step S3111, the value of the backflow number counter corresponding to the ID of the gaming ball may be cleared. In this way, the number of backflows indicates the number of consecutive times the moving direction of the gaming ball of the ID is upward in the vertical direction.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the moving direction of the gaming ball is abnormal (upward in the vertical direction) exceeds a specific number (step S3114). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines, for the ID of each gaming ball, whether or not the value of the backflow counter is greater than the specified number, and the value of the backflow counter corresponding to at least one ID is greater than the specified number. If it is determined that the number is large, it is determined that the number of times the moving direction of the gaming ball is abnormal (upward in the vertical direction) exceeds the specific number.

  If it is determined that the number of times the movement direction of the gaming ball is abnormal (upward in the vertical direction) exceeds the specific number, the sub CPU 201 continues error notification until a power failure occurs (step S3115). In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits to the display control circuit 205 and the voice control circuit 206 a backflow continuation signal indicating that the moving direction of the gaming ball is continuously or intermittently vertically upward. Thereby, an image notifying that the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently vertically upward is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13, or the moving direction of the game ball is continuously or intermittently vertically A sound notifying that the direction is upward is output from the speaker 11 or the like. Further, the sub CPU 201 is a backflow continuation signal indicating that the moving direction of the gaming ball is continuously or intermittently vertically upward directed to the hall computer managing the pachinko gaming machine in the hall (game hall). Send

  If it is determined in step S3111 that there is no game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction), the number of times the movement direction of the game ball is abnormal in step S3114 (vertically upward) If it is determined that the number of times does not exceed the specific number, or after the process of step S3115 is executed, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 7>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, a goto act is conventionally known to try to acquire balls by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, clever fraud has frequently occurred, and it is desirable to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the gaming shop is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The inventor of the present invention detects an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine by using the technology developed by itself in the process of intensively examining the technology for tracking the gaming ball as described above, and prevents tampering or the gaming machine We came up with the idea that it could be useful for responding to problems.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(7-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 executing the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S3004 to step S3006 of FIG. 87);
When it is determined that the moving distance of one gaming ball in a predetermined time is equal to or longer than a predetermined distance based on the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, movement of the game ball Abnormality detection means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of steps S3101 to S3103 in FIG. 88) that detects that the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Although it is considered that the movement distance of the game ball in a certain time does not usually exceed a certain upper limit depending on the structure of the game board, the firing speed of the game ball, etc., the movement distance of the game ball in a certain time However, if the upper limit value is exceeded, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, an illegal action has been taken, or a problem has occurred in the gaming machine. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the movement distance of one game ball (the time calculated in step S3101 of FIG. 88) in a predetermined time (a time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) If it is determined that the movement of the gaming ball is abnormal (error notification is performed) when it is determined that the distance is equal to or greater than the predetermined distance, fraudulent acts are prevented or It is possible to provide an opportunity to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine.

(7-2) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 executing the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S3004 to step S3006 of FIG. 87);
If it is determined that the moving speed of one gaming ball in a predetermined time is out of a predetermined range based on the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the movement of the gaming ball is Abnormality detection means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of steps S3104 to S3106 in FIG. 88) that detects that there is an abnormality;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  The movement speed of the gaming ball in a certain time is normally considered to fall within a certain range according to the structure of the gaming board, the firing speed of the gaming ball, etc. If it does not fall within the above range, there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred, an illegal act has been performed, or a problem has occurred in the gaming machine. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, the moving speed of one gaming ball (the time calculated in step S3104 of FIG. 88) in a predetermined time (time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) Motion of the gaming ball is abnormal when it is determined that the component in the x-axis direction and the component in the y-axis direction are out of the predetermined range (the x-axis direction speed allowable range and the y-axis direction speed allowable range) Is detected (error notification is performed), it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent an unfair act or to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, a goto act (so-called "oil ball") trying to acquire a ball by using an illegal gaming ball ("oil ball") coated with oil It is possible to prevent goto "). For example, conventionally, a goto action is known to aim for winning an attacker by painting lard on a game ball to slow the moving speed of the game ball. Also, in recent years, a goto act has also appeared that attempts to increase the frequency of winning so-called electric chew and attackers by increasing the moving speed of the game ball using oil balls. In the goto action using such "oil balls", the moving speed of the gaming ball is faster or slower than usual, and the moving speed of the gaming ball in a predetermined time (time corresponding to a predetermined number (K) frame) May be out of the predetermined range (the x-axis direction velocity allowable range and the y-axis direction velocity allowable range), and the moving distance may be equal to or larger than the predetermined distance or smaller than the predetermined distance. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to detect that the moving speed of the game ball is increasing or decreasing, so "oil balls" are used. You can quickly detect what is happening. For example, if a game ball with extremely slow moving speed is found near the attacker, the game ball may be painted with lard, and the game ball may have been illegally directed toward the attacker. . In addition, when game balls moving at a speed faster than normal are scattered, there is a possibility that the winning frequency to the electric chew or the attacker has been improperly increased. As described above, by detecting the presence of the game ball moving at a speed different from the normal speed, it is possible to prevent "oil ball goto" from being performed.

  In the sixth embodiment, each time the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed, the movement distance of the game ball in the time corresponding to the latest K frame is calculated, and the subroutine is repeatedly executed. The movement distance is repeatedly calculated. Then, when the latest travel distance among the travel distances obtained in this manner exceeds a predetermined distance, an error notification is performed (see steps S3101 to S3103). In the present invention, among the movement distances thus obtained repeatedly, not only the latest movement distance (the movement distance obtained from the latest one subroutine execution), but also the movement distances (eg, The error notification may be performed on the basis of the 10 travel distances obtained from the last 10 subroutine executions. For example, the error notification may be performed when the average of the latest plural travel distances (for example, the ten travel distances obtained from the last ten subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined distance. The error notification may be performed when the number of times the predetermined distance is exceeded among the plurality of latest times (for example, 10 times) is equal to or more than the predetermined ratio (for example, 50%). When all the moving distances for a minute (for example, the moving distances for five times obtained from the last five subroutine executions) exceed a predetermined distance (that is, the moving distance has a predetermined distance continuously for a predetermined number of times) If it exceeds, an error notification may be issued.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, every time the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed, the movement speed of the gaming ball in the time corresponding to the latest K frame is calculated, and the subroutine is repeatedly executed. Along with this, the moving speed is repeatedly calculated. Then, when the latest moving speed among the moving speeds obtained in this manner exceeds a predetermined speed, an error notification is performed (see steps S3104 to S3106). In the present invention, among the movement speeds obtained repeatedly in this manner, not only the latest movement speed (the movement speed obtained from the latest one subroutine execution) but also the movement speeds for a plurality of latest times (for example, The error notification may be performed on the basis of the 10 traveling speeds obtained from the last 10 subroutine executions. For example, an error notification may be performed when the average of the latest plural moving speeds (for example, the moving speeds of 10 times obtained from the last 10 subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined speed. The error notification may be performed when the number of times the predetermined speed is exceeded among the latest number of times (for example, 10 times) is equal to or more than the predetermined rate (for example, 50%). When all the moving speeds of the minutes (for example, the moving speeds of 5 times obtained from the last 5 subroutine executions) exceed the predetermined speed (that is, the moving speed has a predetermined speed consecutively) If it exceeds, an error notification may be issued.

  Similarly, in the sixth embodiment, whenever the subroutine shown in FIG. 88 is executed once, the acceleration of the game ball in the time corresponding to the latest K frame is calculated, and the subroutine is repeatedly executed. , The said acceleration is calculated repeatedly. Then, when the latest acceleration among the accelerations thus obtained exceeds the predetermined acceleration, an error notification is performed (see steps S3107 to S3109). In the present invention, among the accelerations thus obtained repeatedly, not only the latest acceleration (acceleration obtained from one latest subroutine execution) but also the accelerations for the last several times (for example, the last 10 times) The error notification may be performed on the basis of 10 accelerations obtained from the subroutine execution of For example, when the average of the latest plural accelerations (for example, the ten accelerations obtained from the last ten subroutine executions) exceeds a predetermined acceleration, an error notification may be performed, or the latest alarm may be issued. If the number of times exceeding a predetermined acceleration among a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) is equal to or more than a predetermined rate (for example, 50%), an error notification may be performed. If the acceleration (for example, the acceleration for 5 times obtained from the last 5 subroutine executions) exceeds the acceleration (that is, if the acceleration exceeds the predetermined acceleration continuously for a predetermined number of times), an error occurs. Notification may be performed.

  In the sixth embodiment, the movement distance of the game ball exceeds a predetermined distance, the speed of the game ball exceeds a predetermined speed, and the acceleration of the game ball exceeds a predetermined acceleration. It has been described that error notification is performed if only one of the conditions is satisfied. However, in the present invention, the error notification may be performed when two or all three of the conditions relating to the movement distance, the condition relating to the speed, and the condition relating to the acceleration are satisfied.

  Further, in the present invention, the "predetermined speed" (the allowable range of the speed, refer to step S3105 in FIG. 88) is different according to the existing position of the gaming ball in the gaming area (corresponding to the orbit drawn by the gaming ball) You may For example, immediately after the game ball is released from the ball outlet 41d to the game area 12a (immediately after passing through the ejection area shown in FIG. 39), the game ball moves with the vertically upward velocity component On the other hand, the gaming ball which has started to fall basically moves with the vertically downward velocity component. That is, immediately after the game ball is released from the ball outlet 41d to the game area 12a, the game ball stagnates in the upper part of the game area 12a because the game ball has momentum to move upward against gravity. It is thought that it takes time to hit a nail or other structure and fall down. On the other hand, after that, with the passage of time, the downward speed increases due to the action of gravity, and it is assumed that the gaming ball falls freely. If the gaming ball is within a certain range from the ejection area (or if the elapsed time after the ID is assigned in the ejection area is less than a predetermined time), the gaming ball is out of the range. If the range (lower limit and upper limit) of possible values of the y-axis component of the velocity is different depending on the case (or if the elapsed time since ID is assigned in the injection area is longer than a predetermined time) You may Specifically, assuming that the xy coordinate system as shown in FIG. 89 is set, if the gaming ball is out of a certain range based on the ejection area (progress from being assigned an ID in the ejection area) If the time is more than a predetermined time), the y-axis component of the speed is taken more than if the gaming ball is in the relevant range (the elapsed time after the ID is assigned in the ejection area is less than the predetermined time) It is possible to set the y-axis direction speed allowable range so that the upper limit (lower limit) of the obtained value becomes large. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the movement of the gaming ball from being released to the above-mentioned gaming area to free falling.

Further, the allowable range of the speed for one game ball is the speed of the game ball calculated in the previous subroutine (see step S3104 in FIG. 88) and the acceleration of the game ball calculated in the previous subroutine (step 88 in FIG. It may be configured to be determined as needed according to S3107). That is, for one gaming ball, the component in the x-axis direction of the velocity calculated in the previous subroutine is v _x , the component in the x-axis direction of acceleration is a _x , and the time interval from the previous subroutine to the current subroutine (FIG. Let t (for example, 4 ms) be the time interval at which the processing is performed, the component in the x-axis direction of the velocity that will be calculated in this subroutine has a constant acceleration in between (the movement of the game ball Is expected to be approximately v _x + a _x × t, assuming that The allowable range of the speed calculated in the present subroutine may be calculated based on such an expected value (v _x + a _x t). For example, a range in which the lower limit value is (v _x + a _x t-α _x ) and the upper limit value is (v _x + a _x t + β _x ) can be set as the x-axis direction allowable speed range . Similarly, for one gaming ball, the component in the y-axis direction of the velocity calculated in the previous subroutine is v _y , the component in the y-axis direction of acceleration is a _y , and the time interval from the previous subroutine to the current subroutine (see FIG. The lower limit is (v _y + a _y × t −α _y ) and the upper limit is (v _y + a _y × t + β _y ), where t (eg, 4 ms) is the time interval at which the processing of 88 is performed Such a range can be set as the y-axis direction speed tolerance range. α _x , β _x , α _y , and β _y are respectively predetermined values, and can be calculated by experiments or the like. In particular, the motion of the gaming ball in the x-axis direction can be assumed to be a constant velocity motion, ignoring the friction between the gaming ball and the game board 12 etc. Then, the above in the x-axis component of the velocity The expected value is the same as the previous one (v _x ). Therefore, it is also possible to set a range in which the lower limit value is (v _x −α _y ) and the upper limit value is (v _x + β _y ) as the x-axis direction speed allowable range.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, it has been described that the position coordinates in the ball position image are converted into the position coordinates in the game area 12a (see step S3101 in FIG. 88). However, in the present invention, such coordinate conversion may not necessarily be performed. When coordinate conversion is not performed, the upper limit value of the movement distance (refer to step S3102), the allowable range of speed (refer to step S3105), and the allowable range of acceleration (refer to step S3108) It may be set in correspondence with the XY coordinate system shown in FIG. For example, in order to determine whether the movement distance exceeds the upper limit value, the distance from the position is less than or equal to the upper limit value with reference to the position of the gaming ball in the previous frame image (time T _{N + 1 -K} ). It is also possible to set such a range (a range as shown in FIG. 67) and determine whether or not the position of the gaming ball in the current frame image (time T _{N + 1} ) is within the range. In that case, as in FIG. 67, the range may be set to a size corresponding to the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the gaming ball in the previous frame image (time T _{N + 1 -K} ).

<Supplementary Note 8>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, a goto act is conventionally known to try to acquire balls by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, clever fraud has frequently occurred, and it is desirable to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the gaming shop is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The inventor of the present invention detects an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine by using the technology developed by itself in the process of intensively examining the technology for tracking the gaming ball as described above, and prevents tampering or the gaming machine We came up with the idea that it could be useful for responding to problems.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(8-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down,
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 executing the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S3004 to step S3006 of FIG. 87);
For one game ball, the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time and the position of the one game ball included in the frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time Whether or not the position change of the one game ball between the one time and the time later than the one time corresponds to the backflow which can not occur in the flow of the normal game ball Backflow detecting means (step S3107, step S3108, step S31110, step S3111, step S3113, and sub CPU201 for executing the process of step S3114 in FIG. 88);
Abnormality detection means capable of detecting that the movement of the gaming ball is abnormal based on the determination result by the backflow detection means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

When the game ball moves in the game area, gravity acts on the game ball, and if the game ball moves against gravity, some abnormality has occurred, and an illegal action has been taken There may be a problem with the gaming machine. And, if the backflow (movement of the game ball upward in the vertical direction) occurs in a mode that can not occur when the game ball is flowing normally, the game ball is moving against gravity there is a possibility. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the position (for example, FIG. 89) of one gaming ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time (time T _{N + 1 -K} ) _1, and the corresponding position) y _1), the position of the game ball of the one included in the frame image corresponding to the time (time T _{N + 1)} after time of the one (e.g., shown in FIG. 89 (x ₂ and y ₂ ), and the one game from the one time (time T _{N + 1 -K} ) to the time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ) It is determined whether or not the change in position of the ball corresponds to backflow which can not occur in normal flow of the game ball. Thus, it is possible to detect that the gaming ball is moving against gravity, and it is possible to detect that the movement of the gaming ball is abnormal based on the detection result. In this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine.

In the sixth embodiment, if there is a game ball whose movement direction is abnormal (the movement direction is upward in the vertical direction), it is detected that the movement of the game ball is abnormal (error notification is performed). It has been described (see step S3111 and step S3112 in FIG. 88). However, in the present invention, as a condition for error notification to be performed, it is not sufficient to merely have a gaming ball whose moving direction is vertically upward, and when a more restrictive condition is established, An error notification may be issued. For example, error notification may be performed on the condition that there is a game ball whose upward moving distance in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than a predetermined distance. Vertical upward moving distance of one game ball (in the example shown in FIG. 89, y ₁₎ the time T _{N + 1-K} value of y-axis coordinate of the position of the game balls in a, the game ball at time T _{N + 1} It can be calculated as the difference between the position of y and the value of y-axis coordinate (in the example shown in FIG. 89, y ₂ ) (see step S3110 in FIG. 88). In addition, an error notification may be performed on the condition that there is a gaming ball whose moving time upward in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than a predetermined time. That the upward moving time in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than the predetermined time is equivalent to the fact that the moving direction is upward in the vertical direction is continuous with the predetermined number of times, and it is determined by the method described in step S3113 in FIG. It is possible. The condition regarding the moving distance upward in the vertical direction and the condition regarding the number of times moving upward in the vertical direction may be used alone or in combination. For example, it is also possible to perform an error notification on the condition that there is a game ball whose movement distance upward in the vertical direction is equal to or longer than a predetermined distance continues a predetermined number of times.

  As described above, by appropriately setting the conditions relating to the upward moving distance in the vertical direction and the conditions relating to the number of times of upward movement in the vertical direction, it is possible to detect “a reverse flow that can not occur in the flow of normal gaming balls”. Here, "a backflow which can not occur in the flow of the normal game ball" refers to the "backflow" excluding "a backflow that may occur in the flow of the normal game ball". "Backflow" means that the gaming ball moves upward in the vertical direction. As described above, when the game ball is flowing down normally, as described above, when the game ball collides with some structure (such as a nail), the moving direction of the game ball is temporarily upward in the vertical direction. And the case where the gaming ball rolls upward on a surface (for example, a so-called stage for guiding the gaming ball to the starting opening) inclined in the vertical direction and having a height difference. In such "a reverse flow that can occur in the flow of a normal game ball", the vertical upward movement distance and the number of vertical upward movement are within a certain range according to the structure of the gaming machine (game board) Where it is considered to fall within the scope, the range can be determined by conducting an experiment. In the present invention, the range determined in this manner is set in advance, and "backflow" not falling within the range is detected as "backflow which can not occur in the normal flow of the game ball". Is possible.

  Alternatively, when the game ball flows down the game area, gravity acts on the game ball, and the component in the y-axis direction of the acceleration basically corresponds to the gravity acceleration (or a value close thereto), and the game ball plays the game It is considered to be substantially constant while flowing down the region. Strictly speaking, the value of the y-axis component of the acceleration may not match the gravity acceleration due to friction or air resistance generated between the game board or a structure provided on the game board and the game ball. However, it is considered that the value falls within a certain range depending on the structure of the gaming machine (playing board), and the range of possible values of the y-axis component of such acceleration (y-axis direction acceleration The tolerance range can be determined by conducting an experiment. In the present invention, the allowable range of y-axis direction acceleration determined in this way is set in advance, and when the component in the y-axis direction of acceleration falls outside the allowable range, Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that “unremarkable backflow” has occurred.

(8-2) A game board (for example, game board 12) provided with a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can move;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 executing the process of step S3001 in FIG. 87) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image acquired by the frame image acquisition means (the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S3004 to step S3006 of FIG. 87);
Based on the position of one gaming ball included in a frame image corresponding to one time and the location of the one gaming ball included in a frame image corresponding to a time later than the one time Movement direction detection means (sub CPU 201 executing the process of step S3110 of FIG. 88) for detecting the movement direction of the one game ball from the time of 1 to the time after the one of time;
Based on the movement direction of the game ball detected by the movement direction detection means, an abnormality detection means capable of detecting that the movement of the game ball is abnormal (the processing of steps S3111 to S3115 in FIG. 88 is executed. Sub CPU 201),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

When the game ball moves in the game area, the route that the game ball can usually follow is generally determined, and if the game ball is moving out of this route, some sort of abnormality has occurred and cheating has occurred There is a possibility that something has been done or a problem has occurred in the gaming machine. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the position (for example, FIG. 89) of one gaming ball included in the frame image corresponding to one time (time T _{N + 1 -K} ) _1, and the corresponding position) y _1), the position of the game ball of the one included in the frame image corresponding to the time (time T _{N + 1)} after time of the one (e.g., shown in FIG. 89 (x The movement of the one game ball from the one time (time T _{N + 1 -K} ) to the time later than the one time (time T _{N + 1} ) based on the position corresponding to ₂ , y ₂ )) The direction (vertically downward or vertically upward) is detected. This makes it possible to detect that the movement of the gaming ball is abnormal when the movement direction of the gaming ball is different from normal (upward in the vertical direction). It is possible to provide an opportunity to cope with a malfunction of the machine.

  In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to prevent so-called "ball with thread". That is, in the case where an illegal gaming ball with a thread ("ball with a thread") is used, the moving direction of the gaming ball is different from usual (in particular, the position of the gaming ball rises against the gravity )there is a possibility. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, since it is possible to detect that the moving direction of the gaming ball is vertically upward, it is possible to use "balls with thread" You can detect it quickly. For example, in a goto action using a ball with a thread, put a gaming ball attached with a thread from the upper plate, have the launcher fire the gaming ball, and pull the thread after the gaming ball passes through the winning device Thus, the game ball is operated to move back and forth in the installation location of the winning detection sensor (even if the game ball is not fired, the winning detection is performed). According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, when the game ball moves back and forth through the installation location of the sensor, the motion of the game ball moving downward and then moving upward is repeated. Such unnatural movement (upward movement) of the game ball can be detected. Thereby, it can be prevented in advance that the “thread with ball goto” is performed.

Further, in the above-described "grape goto", there is a possibility that a plurality of gaming balls move repeatedly from "grape" to the starting area etc. while drawing similar trajectories with a fixed time interval. In this respect, when the movement loci of a plurality of other game balls are included in a predetermined range based on the movement locus of one game ball, all movement loci of these game balls belong to the predetermined area. It is possible to assume that the movement tracks of these gaming balls are similar. Here, the movement trajectory of the gaming ball can be subdivided into movement in a minute time. Such "moving in a micro time" (in FIG. 88, K frames) predetermined number of frames in the example of the vector (Figure 89 showing the moving direction of the game balls between, and starting from _{(x 1, y 1) (} x 2 , Y ₂ ) is represented as a vector). The movement trajectory of the gaming ball is obtained by connecting a large number of such movement directions (vectors). Therefore, if the movement directions (vectors) of a plurality of other game balls are included in a predetermined range based on the movement track of one game ball, these game balls move in a similar track. It will be done. From the above, if the movement direction (vector) of each gaming ball is detected and it is determined whether or not the movement direction (vector) is included in the predetermined range, these gaming balls have similar trajectories. It is possible to detect what you are drawing. This makes it possible to discover the situation in which the “goji goto” is going to take place and to get the opportunity to prevent the goto action from being completed.

Seventh Embodiment
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to sixth embodiments applies also in the seventh embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are provided inside the second large winning opening 54 in the configuration for realizing the V prize (see FIG. 5), and the attitude of the displacement member 39 Is described as switching between the state in which the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is easy and the state in which the V winning is impossible or difficult. In the seventh embodiment, another configuration is adopted as a configuration for achieving the V winning.

<Kloon>
FIG. 90 is a diagram for describing a configuration for realizing the V winning. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing regions near the crane and the stage included in the image captured by the CCD camera.

  In the present embodiment, the V winning is realized by the configuration shown in FIG. Specifically, four holes are provided in the clave 3001, and one of the four holes constitutes a specific area 3038A. The remaining three holes constitute nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. When the gaming ball passes through the specific area 3038A, it becomes "V prize winning".

  Describing in more detail, the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening 54 is guided by a guiding path (not shown) to reach the inclined surface 3002. The inclined surface 3002 is formed to be inclined downward from left to right in front view. The gaming balls having reached the inclined surface 3002 flow down to the stage 3003 formed continuously with the inclined surface 3002.

  The stage 3003 is provided with three holes having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the three holes vertically penetrate the stage 3003. Thus, ball passages 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c) for guiding the gaming balls downward are formed. Of the three ball passages 3004, the one closest to the inclined surface 3002 is the ball passage 3004a, the one furthest from the inclined surface 3002 is the ball passage 3004c, and the ball passage 3004b between the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c Is provided.

  The upper surface of the stage 3003 is substantially flat, but has a slight inclination in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In the left-right direction, the vicinity of the center (the forming position of the ball passage 3004b) is the highest, and the forming position of the ball passage 3004a and the forming position of the ball passage 3004c are the lowest. That is, the upper surface of the stage 3003 is inclined downward toward the right from the inclined surface 3002 to the formation position of the ball passage 3004a, and from the formation position of the ball passage 3004a to the formation position of the ball passage 3004b is It is inclined upward, and from the formation position of the ball passage 3004b to the formation position of the ball passage 3004c is inclined downward toward the right. In the front-rear direction, the formation position of the ball passage 3004a is the lowest on the left side of the ball passage 3004b, and the formation position of the ball passage 3004c is the lowest on the right side of the ball passage 3004b.

  As a result, the gaming balls flowed down to the stage 3003 formed continuously with the inclined surface 3002 roll on the stage 3003 and then, in one of the three holes corresponding to the ball passages 3004a, 3004b, and 3004c. Be sure to enter, and the game ball will not stop on the upper surface of the stage 3003. In addition, the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c are formed at a position higher than the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c, and the two holes corresponding to the ball passage 3004a and the ball passage 3004c are compared. Thus, it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004b.

  The ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c) is continuous with the clone 3001, and gaming balls having passed through any of the ball passages 3004a, 3004b, 3004c are carried to the clone 3001. The clune 3001 has a dish-like shape, and is provided with a structure inclined downward from the peripheral edge to the center. The specific area 3038A and the nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D are provided near the center of the clune 3001, and the gaming balls carried from the ball passage 3004 to the clune 3001 are the specific area 3038A and the nonspecificity. In any of the four holes corresponding to the areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D, the game ball does not stop on the clone 3001.

  In the front view, the specific region 3038A and the nonspecific region 3038C substantially coincide in position with the ball passage 3004b in the lateral direction, and the specific region 3038A is closer to the ball passage 3004b than the nonspecific region 3038C There is. The nonspecific area 3038B is formed on the right side of the specific area 3038A and the nonspecific area 3038C, and slightly on the left side of the ball passage 3004c. The non-specific area 3038D is formed on the left side of the specific area 3038A and the non-specific area 3038C, and slightly on the right side of the ball passage 3004a. Also, the four holes corresponding to the specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D have a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the sizes of the four holes are approximately equal. It has become.

  From the above, when the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A (V winning and the like) as compared with the case where the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004c. Probability of becoming higher). In the case where the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004a and the case where the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004c, the probability (the probability of becoming a V winning) that the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A is substantially equal. In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A (probability of becoming a V winning) is higher than the probability of entering the non-specific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D It's getting higher.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004a, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038D is higher than when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004b or the ball passage 3004c. There is. In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004a, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038D is higher than the probability that the game area enters the specific area 3038A or the non-specific area 3038B, 3038C. ing.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004c, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038B is higher than when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004b. There is. In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004c, the probability that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038B is higher than the probability that the game area enters the specific area 3038A or the non-specific area 3038C, 3038D. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming ball that has won the second large winning opening 54 and reached the stage 3003 enters the non-specific area 3038B or the non-specific area 3038D with the highest probability (for example, 1/3 probability) And enter the specific area 3038A with the next highest probability (for example, a probability of 1⁄4), and enter the non-specific area 3038C with the lowest probability (for example, a probability of 1/12). The entry probability to each area is not particularly limited, and may be the same probability (1/4).

  Although not shown, a specific area sensor 3380A is disposed in the specific area 3038A, and the passage (V winning) of the gaming ball in the specific area 3038A is detected by the specific area sensor 3380A. Similarly, nonspecific area sensors 3380B, 3380C, 3380D are disposed in the nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D, respectively, and the passage of gaming balls in the nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D is a nonspecific area sensor It is detected by 3380B, 3380C, 3380D.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the grone 3001, the ball passage 3004 and the stage 3003 are all included in the imaging range of the CCD camera 1000. The clune 3001, the ball passage 3004, and the stage 3003 may be covered with a glass plate or the like made of a transparent member, but in this case as well, the game balls moving these can be seen by the player The game ball is also included in the image obtained from the photographing by the CCD camera 1000 (see FIG. 91).

<Command analysis process>
In the first embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 29 is described as the command analysis process (see step S204 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 92 is performed.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  The command analysis process shown in FIG. 92 is basically the same as the command analysis process shown in FIG. To explain the summary, the sub CPU 201 analyzes various commands received from the main control circuit 70 (step S3501). Although not described in the first embodiment, the command received from the main control circuit 70 includes a V prize success command and a V prize failure command. The V prize success command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when the V prize is successful. The V prize failure command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when the V prize failure has failed.

  Specifically, when the V winning is successful (when the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A), a detection signal is output from the specific area sensor 3380A disposed in the specific area 3038A to the main control circuit 70. Ru. By receiving the detection signal, the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 recognizes that the V winning is successful. The main CPU 71 then generates a V winning success command, and stores the generated V winning success command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73. The V prize success command includes information (V prize success information) indicating that the V prize has succeeded (the gaming ball has entered the specific area 3038A).

  Similarly, when V winning fails (when the game ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D), non-specific area sensors disposed in the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D, respectively. A detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70 from any of 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D. By receiving the detection signal, the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 recognizes that the V winning has failed. Then, the main CPU 71 generates a V prize failure command, and stores the generated V prize failure command in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73. The V prize failure command includes information (V prize failure information) indicating that the V prize has failed (the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D), and the non-specific area 3038 B , 3038C, 3038D, which includes information indicating which of the game balls has entered.

  The V prize winning success command or the V prize winning failure command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the command output process (see step S35 in FIG. 15). Here, as the command output process, the same process as the communication data transmission process shown in FIG. 62 is performed. That is, each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed a predetermined number of times (16 times in the example of FIG. 62), the command stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 73 is sent to the sub control circuit 200. It will be sent.

  The V prize success command and the V prize failure command are transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as described above. The command received by the sub control circuit 200 is stored in the work RAM 203. If the received command is the V prize success command, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect pattern (see FIG. 95) corresponding to the success of the V prize, and if the received command is the V prize failure command, the sub CPU 201 The effect pattern (see FIG. 95) corresponding to the failure of the V winning is determined (step S3503). Then, the sub CPU 201 registers the determined effect pattern (step S3505), and ends this subroutine.

<Demonstration mode determination processing>
In the first embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 30 has been described as the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 93 is performed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing how discharge areas are set for the specific area and the non-specific area. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination table.

  In the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 93, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a camera image analysis process (step S3601). The camera image analysis process is as described in detail in the first to sixth embodiments, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when the sub CPU 201 succeeds in the V prize (when the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A) or when the V prize fails (in the non-specific area 3038 B, 3038 C, 3038 D) In the case of entering the ball, the effect pattern according to the success or failure of the V prize is selected, and the selected effect pattern is reflected (registered) in the game data stored in the work RAM 203 (step S3602).

  In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the gaming ball has entered any of the V winning areas (the specific area 3038A and the nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) based on the processing result in step S3601. To judge. In the present embodiment, an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the V winning area is set as a discharge area (see FIG. 39) for each V winning area (see FIG. 94). Therefore, if the gaming ball enters any of the V winning areas, the sub CPU 201 determines "YES" in step S307 of FIG. 42 (that is, information indicating that the gaming ball belongs to the discharge area ( It is determined that the flag just before discharging is set). Here, the game ball belongs to the discharge area set for any V winning area in the immediately before discharge flag set when the game ball belongs to the discharge area set for the V winning area. The information (V winning area information) indicating that is associated with each other. Based on the V winning area information, the sub CPU 201 can determine whether the gaming ball has entered any of the V winning areas, and the gaming ball is in any of the V winning areas. If it is determined that the ball is entered, it is possible to recognize which one of the specific area 3038A and the nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D is the V winning area in which the game ball entered the ball. .

  Then, if it is determined that the gaming ball has entered into any of the V winning area, the sub CPU 201 enters the V winning based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 95) stored in the program ROM 202. The effect pattern according to the area for use is selected. In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 95, the range of random number values and the effect pattern are defined in association with each other for the V winning region. The effect pattern includes information indicating the content of the effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V winning. Four types of V winning success effects (V winning success effects 1 to 4) are provided as effects corresponding to the success of the V winning (effects that indicate the success of the V winning), and effects (in accordance with the failure of the V winning) Four types of V prize failure rendering effects (V prize failure rendering effects 1 to 4) are provided as the effect indicating the failure of the V prize.

  For example, when entering the specific area 3038A, if the acquired random number is 100, “EN1” is selected as the effect pattern. The effect pattern “EN1” corresponds to the V winning success effect 1. Also, for example, in the case of entering the non-specific area 3038C, when the acquired random number is 500, “EN10” is selected as the effect pattern. The effect pattern "EN10" corresponds to the V prize failure effect effect 1.

  As shown in FIG. 95, when the game ball enters the specific area 3038A, an effect pattern corresponding to the V winning success effect (any of the V success effect effects 1 to 4) is necessarily selected. Also, when the game ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D, the effect pattern corresponding to the V prize failure effect (any of the V failure effect effects 1 to 4) must be selected Be done.

  In the case where it is determined in step S3602 in FIG. 93 that the gaming ball has not entered any V winning area, or the gaming ball has been determined to have entered any V winning area. After registering the effect pattern (see FIG. 95), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S3603 to step S3606. Since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S262 to S265 of FIG. 30, the detailed description will be omitted, but the sub CPU 201 registers the effect pattern registered at step S3602 and the step S3505 of FIG. Requests (drawing request, sound request, lamp request, and role request) for controlling various effect devices (liquid crystal display device 13, speaker 11, LED 59, various movable roles, etc.) according to the effect pattern Generate). Based on these requests, various effect devices are controlled, and various effects such as effects according to the success or failure of V winning are performed (see steps S206 to S209 in FIG. 26).

  As described above, as the effect pattern according to the ball entering the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), the received command (V winning success command or There are cases where the effect pattern is registered based on the V prize failure command) (see step S3505 in FIG. 92) and when the effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera image analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93). . Here, in the time from the game ball entering the V winning area to the time the effect pattern corresponding to the ball is registered, the effect pattern is registered based on the received command (step in FIG. 92). In the case where the effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera image analysis processing (refer to step S3505) (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) is shorter.

  Specifically, as described above, in the present embodiment, each time the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed a predetermined number of times in the main control circuit 70, a command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. For example, assuming that the system timer interrupt process is performed at 2 ms intervals, and the predetermined number of times = 16 times (see step S1055 in FIG. 62), the command is transmitted at 32 ms intervals. Therefore, after the game ball enters any of the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), an effect pattern (in accordance with the V successful winning command or the V winning failure command) Until the step S3505 shown in FIG. 92 is registered, a delay of approximately 32 ms occurs at the maximum.

  On the other hand, if the time interval of the sub control main process (see FIG. 26) in the sub control circuit 200 is 4 ms, the time interval of the camera image analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93) is also 4 ms. Here, assuming that the frame rate of the CCD camera 1000 is 250 fps (acquisition interval of frame images by the CCD camera = 4 ms), the sub CPU 201 executes the latest frame image from the CCD camera 1000 each time camera image analysis processing is performed. One is acquired (refer step S281 of FIG. 31). In the tracking of the game ball (see step S304 in FIG. 42) based on the subsequent inter-frame difference extraction (see step S284 in FIG. 31), the position of the game ball before the time (4 ms) equivalent to one frame is specified Because it will be different (see Figure 33), after the game ball passes the discharge territory which is set vis-a-vis the territory for V winning a prize, until sub CPU201 recognizes that (the flag just before discharge is set) take time. Further, the sub-CPU 201 makes a determination of "YES" in step S307 of the next time (after the time equivalent to one frame = 4 ms) (step S307 in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42)), the game ball is a V prize area Since it is recognized that the player has entered the ball, the game ball enters the V prize area (the specific area 3038A and the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), and then the effect pattern determination table Based on (see FIG. 95), the delay time until the effect pattern (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) according to the entered V winning area is registered is about 8 ms at maximum.

  As described above, during the time from the game ball entering the V prize area to the time the effect pattern according to the ball is registered, the received command (V prize success command or V prize failure command) When the effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera image analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the effect pattern is shorter than in the case where the effect pattern is registered based on) (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). In the processes of steps S3603 to S3606, the sub CPU 201 may refer to both of these effect patterns, or the effect pattern registered based on the result of the camera image analysis process reflects the latest information In view of the fact that only the effect pattern may be referred to. In that case, the process of registering the effect pattern (see steps S3503 and S3505 in FIG. 92) based on the command (V prize success command or V prize failure command) may not be performed.

  After executing the process of step S3606, the sub CPU 201 executes a winning information determination process (step S3607). The winning information determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S3607, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

<Prize information determination process>
FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing a winning information determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the winning information determination process shown in FIG. 96, first, the sub CPU 201 identifies winning information (1) based on the command (see step S3501 in FIG. 92) received from the main control circuit 70 (step S3701).

  In this process, when the sub CPU 201 receives the V winning success command, the sub CPU 201 specifies information included in the V winning success command. As described above, the V prize success command includes information (V prize success information) indicating that the gaming ball has entered the specific area 3038A. The sub CPU 201 specifies the V winning success information as the winning information (1) and stores the information in the work RAM 203.

  When the sub CPU 201 receives the V prize failure command, the sub CPU 201 specifies information included in the V prize failure command. As described above, the V prize failure command includes information (V prize failure information) indicating that the gaming ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D. The sub CPU 201 identifies the V prize failure information as prize information (1) and stores the information in the work RAM 203.

  Further, when neither the V prize success command nor the V prize failure command has been received, the sub CPU 201 enters the game ball in any V prize area (specific area 3038A, and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). The information (non-entry information) indicating that the ball is not ball is specified as the winning information (1) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 identifies winning information (2) based on the camera image analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93) (step S3702).

  In this process, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has not entered any V prize area (specific area 3038A, and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) in step S3602 of FIG. 93. The information (non-entry information) indicating that the gaming ball has not entered the V prize area is specified as the prize information (2) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  The sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has entered any of the V winning areas (specific area 3038A and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) in step S3602 of FIG. 93, When it is determined that the V winning area into which the game ball entered is determined to be the specific area 3038A, information (V winning success information) indicating that the game ball has entered the specific area 3038A, the prize information (2) Are specified and stored in the work RAM 203.

  The sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has entered any of the V winning areas (specific area 3038A and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) in step S3602 of FIG. 93, When it is determined that the V winning area entered by the game ball is any of the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D, the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038 B, 3038 C, and 3038 D. The information (V winning a prize failure information) indicative of is identified as winning information (2) and stored in the work RAM 203.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 compares the winning information (1) specified in step S3701 with the winning information (2) specified in step S3702 (step S3703).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 compares the winning information (1) and the winning information (2) in step S3703, and as a result, if there is a wrinkle between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2), an error notification is issued. The operation is performed (step S3704). In this process, when the winning information (1) and the winning information (2) are different, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a wrinkle between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2). Then, in particular, the sub CPU 201 is a command received from the main control circuit 70 when the winning information (1) is the V winning success information while the winning information (2) is the V failure information or non-entry information. An error signal indicating that there is a gap between the and the analysis result of the camera image is transmitted to the display control circuit 205 and the audio control circuit 206. Thereby, an image notifying that there is a wrinkle between the command received from the main control circuit 70 and the analysis result of the camera image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 or the command and camera image received from the main control circuit 70 A sound is output from the speaker 11 to notify that there is a habit between the analysis result of the above. In addition, the sub CPU 201 is an error indicating that a hall computer managing a pachinko gaming machine in a hall (gaming hall) has a defect between a command received from the main control circuit 70 and an analysis result of a camera image. Send a signal. After executing the processing of step S3704, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, during the time from when the gaming ball enters the V winning area to when the effect pattern according to the entering ball is registered, the received command (V winning success command or V winning failure command) When the effect pattern is registered based on the result of the camera image analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the effect pattern is shorter than in the case where the effect pattern is registered based on) (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). Similarly to this, the time from when the game ball enters the V prize area to when information (V prize success information or V prize failure information) indicating that is specified as prize information (1) is It will be longer than the time until it is identified as winning information (2). Therefore, after the game ball enters the V prize area, a situation occurs in which the prize information (2) is V prize success information or V prize failure information, but the prize information (1) is non entering information. It can. Therefore, in such a case, if there is a defect between the winning information (1) and the winning information (2), it will not immediately stop and wait for a predetermined time to elapse while holding the winning information (2). Then, the prize information (1) and the prize information (2) may be compared again.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 9>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing Open 2005-237864 gazette).

  By the way, in the gaming machine industry, a goto act is conventionally known to try to acquire balls by an illegal method. In particular, in recent years, clever fraud has frequently occurred, and it is desirable to prevent such acts. In addition, when a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the gaming shop is required to quickly detect the malfunction and take an appropriate response.

  The inventor of the present invention detects an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine by using the technology developed by itself in the process of intensively examining the technology for tracking the gaming ball as described above, and prevents tampering or the gaming machine We came up with the idea that it could be useful for responding to problems.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to detect an abnormality occurring in a gaming machine.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) where game balls can flow down,
A winning area where game balls which have flowed down the game area can enter
Winning signal receiving means for receiving a specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that a game ball has entered the specific winning region (specific region 3038A);
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
Based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, a winning detection means (step S3602 in FIG. 93) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific winning area The sub CPU 201) to execute
An abnormality can be detected based on the presence / absence of reception of the specific prize signal by the prize signal receiving unit and presence / absence of detection of entering the gaming ball to the particular prize area by the prize detection unit. Abnormality detection means (sub CPU 201 executing the processing of FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Even though the game ball has not entered the certain winning area (specific area 3038A), the winning signal (V prize success command) is received, or the gaming ball has entered the certain pay area (specific area 3038A) If the prize signal (V prize success command) is not received regardless of that, there is a possibility that some sort of abnormality has occurred, cheating has occurred, or a problem has occurred in the gaming machine. There is. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the specific winning is achieved based on the position of the gaming ball included in the frame image obtained by photographing the gaming area with the photographing device (CCD camera 1000). When the game ball enters the area (specific area 3038A), the ball is detected. Therefore, it is possible to judge whether or not there is a flaw between the presence of the detection and the presence or absence of the reception of the prize signal (V prize success command), and if there is a flaw based on the judgment result. , The eyelid can be detected as abnormal. In this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine.

(9-2) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down,
A winning area where game balls which have flowed down the game area can enter
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
First control means (main control circuit 70) for performing control related to gaming;
And second control means (sub control circuit 200) different from the first control means.
The first control means is
Winning signal transmission means (main CPU 71 for executing processing similar to that in FIG. 62) for transmitting to the second control means a specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning area Equipped with
The second control means is
Winning signal receiving means for receiving the specific winning signal transmitted by the winning signal transmitting means;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
Based on the position of the game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, a winning detection means (step S3602 in FIG. 93) for detecting that the game ball has entered the specific winning area The sub CPU 201) to execute
An abnormality can be detected based on the presence / absence of reception of the specific prize signal by the prize signal receiving unit and presence / absence of detection of entering the gaming ball to the particular prize area by the prize detection unit. Abnormality detection means (sub CPU 201 executing the processing of FIG. 96);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  Even though the game ball has not entered the certain winning area (specific area 3038A), the winning signal (V prize success command) is received, or the gaming ball has entered the certain pay area (specific area 3038A) If the prize signal (V prize success command) is not received regardless of that, there is a possibility that some sort of abnormality has occurred, cheating has occurred, or a problem has occurred in the gaming machine. There is. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the second control means (sub control circuit 200) controls the game area when the game ball enters the specific winning area (specific area 3038A). The ball entering is detected based on the position of the game ball included in the frame image obtained by photographing with the photographing device (CCD camera 1000). Therefore, the second control means (sub control circuit 200) sets up between the presence or absence of the detection and the presence or absence of reception of the winning signal (V prize success command) from the first control means (main control circuit 70). It is possible to determine whether or not there is a problem, and if there is a wrinkle based on the judgment result, the wrinkle can be detected as an abnormality. As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, the first control means (main control circuit 70) and the second control means (sub control circuit 200) cooperate to acquire Double check comparing information to be obtained (winning information (1) shown in FIG. 96) with information (winning information (2) shown in FIG. 96) that the second control means (sub control circuit 200) can acquire independently It is possible to provide an opportunity to prevent fraud or to cope with a malfunction of the gaming machine.

(9-3) The gaming machine according to (9-1) or (9-2) above,
The abnormality detection means
While the specific winning signal is received by the winning signal receiving means, an abnormality is detected when the winning detection means does not detect that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning area.
It is characterized by

  If a game winning signal (V prize winning success command) is received despite the fact that the game ball has not entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A), there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has taken place. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, while the specific winning signal (V winning success command) indicating that the gaming ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A) is received. In the case where it is not detected that the game ball has entered the specific winning area (specific area 3038A), an abnormality is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect a situation in which a so-called "radio wave goto" is about to be performed by operating the winning signal illegally, and to obtain an opportunity to prevent the goto action from being completed.

  In addition, as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, after the gaming ball enters the V prize area (specific area 3038A and nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) The time until the effect pattern corresponding to the ball entry is registered is based on the result of the camera image analysis process than in the case where the effect pattern is registered based on the received command (see step S3505 in FIG. 92). The case of registering a pattern (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) is shorter. Thereby, in a situation where the game ball enters the V prize area, temporarily, it takes a relatively long time to transmit a command (V prize success command or V prize failure command) from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200. Even in such a case, it is possible to perform effects (see FIG. 95) according to the success or failure of the V winning based on the result of the camera image analysis processing without waiting for the transmission of the command, so It is possible to shorten the delay time until the entry into the winning area is reflected in the effect contents. In addition, since commands (V prize success command and V prize failure command) are not essential in performing effects (see FIG. 95) according to the success or failure of V prize, the V prize success command and V prize failure command are main control It may not be created in the circuit 70. In that case, it is not necessary to detect that the V prize has failed (the game ball has entered any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) in the first place, and the game balls may not be detected in the non-specific area 3038B, 3038C, The non-specific area sensors 3380B, 3380C, and 3380D for detecting entry into the ball 3038D may not be provided. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment detects that the gaming ball has entered the predetermined area based on the result of the camera image analysis process, and performs effects in response to the detection. Such a feature is widely applicable to various types of models such as a winning opening without a sensor and a one-shot platform.

<Modification>
In the seventh embodiment, the result of the camera image analysis process (see step S3602 in FIG. 93) that the game ball has entered the V prize area (specific area 3038A and nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) The case has been described in which an effect (effect indicating effect of success or failure of V winning) is performed according to the detection, based on the detection. In the following modification, based on the result of the camera image analysis process, the movement of the gaming ball before the gaming ball enters the V winning region (specific region 3038A and non-specific region 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) A case will be described in which an effect (effect that suggests success or failure of V winning) is performed before entering the V winning area according to the detection result and the V winning area.

  Hereinafter, the modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 99. FIG. 97 (a) is a view showing movement of the game ball on the cruise line. FIG. 97 (b) is a view showing how the gaming ball rolls on the stage. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an effect pattern determination table. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing how the discharge area is set for the ball passage.

  First, as a premise, in the present modification, the process performed by the sub CPU 201 in step S3602 of FIG. 93 will be described. The game ball changes its position every moment with the passage of time, but the sub CPU 201 specifies the position of the game ball at the photographing timing of the frame image at any time by the camera image analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93). (See step S304 in FIG. 42). Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, not only the latest position information but also position information of a predetermined number of the most recent frames is held in the work RAM 203, as described above. (See step S3101 in FIG. 88). Thereby, the sub CPU 201 can grasp the relationship between the "time" and the "position of the game ball". And, between the "time" and the "position of the gaming ball", the relationship that "the position of the gaming ball changes with the change of the time" is established, and "the position of the gaming ball" is It is represented by the values of the X-axis coordinates and the values of the Y-axis coordinates on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane (see FIG. 67). Therefore, with respect to two variables of "value of X-axis coordinate of position of gaming ball" and "time", "value of X-axis coordinate of position of gaming ball" can be expressed as a function of "time". Similarly, with respect to two variables of “value of Y-axis coordinate of position of gaming ball” and “time”, “value of Y-axis coordinate of position of gaming ball” can be expressed as a function of “time”. Thereby, "the value of the Y-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball" can be expressed as a function of "the value of the X-axis coordinate of the position of the game ball". The sub CPU 201 calculates the function based on the position information (position information for a plurality of frames) of the gaming ball stored in the work RAM 203. The function corresponds to the trace drawn by the gaming ball in the frame image. Such a function is called a locus function.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows that one game ball is moving on the clone 3001, and the present position of the game ball is shown as a game ball 120p. Although the game ball can move on the track 3001 in various orbits, FIG. 97 (a) shows two examples of such orbits.

  The first example is that one gaming ball moves on the track of (I) and (i). The trajectory drawn by the gaming ball until it reaches the current position (ie, the trajectory of (I) shown in FIG. 97 (a)) can be represented as the aforementioned trajectory function. And, under the situation where external force does not work, the trajectory of (I) and the trajectory of (i) are expressed as the same function, so the sub CPU 201 determines the trajectory of (i) based on the trajectory function. It is possible to recognize in what orbit the sphere moves in the future. The gaming ball that has passed the current position then moves along the trajectory of (i) (the trajectory function), and the sub CPU 201 selects one of the V winning areas (specific region 3038A, and the like) on the trajectory function. If the non-specific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) exists, it can be recognized that the game ball enters the V prize area. In the example of FIG. 97 (a), the non-specific area 3038D exists on the trajectory (locus function) of (i), and in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming ball enters the non-specific area 3038D. Do. The second example is that one gaming ball moves on the track of (II) and (ii). In the same manner as described above, in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming ball enters the non-specific area 3038B.

  As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines which V winning area the gaming ball is to enter. Thereafter, based on the effect pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 202, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern according to the V winning area determined to be hit. The sub CPU 201 may refer to the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 95, but in this case, refers to the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (a).

  In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (a), the range of random value and the effect pattern are defined in association with each other for the V winning area. The effect pattern includes information indicating the content of the effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V winning. Three types of V winning success effects (V winning success effects 1 to 3) are provided as effects corresponding to the success of the V winning (effects that indicate the success of the V winning), and effects (in accordance with the failure of the V winning) Three types of V prize failure rendering effects (V prize failure rendering effects 1 to 3) are provided as the effect of suggesting the failure of the V prize.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 98 (a), when it is determined that the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A, the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected. The probability of being selected is higher than the probability of selection of the effect pattern (“EN 4”) corresponding to the V prize failure rendering effect. In addition, when it is determined that the game ball enters the specific area 3038A, the probability that the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected is the non-specific area 3038B When it is determined to enter the ball, the probability that the effect pattern (“EN 8”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, and when it is determined that the gaming ball enters the non-specific area 3038 C, it corresponds to the V winning success effect The selection probability of the effect pattern (“EN12”) to be selected, and the effect pattern (“EN16”) corresponding to the V prize success effect being selected when it is determined that the game ball enters the non-specific area 3038D It is higher than the probability. In addition, when the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the V winning area in which the game ball enters is specified The probability of being in the area 3038A is V that the game ball enters when the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected. It is higher than the probability that the winning area is any one of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D. In addition, when the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8”, “EN12”, “EN16”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the V winning area in which the game ball enters is specified The probability of being in the area 3038A is that the effect pattern (“EN 4”, “EN 5” to “EN 7”, “EN 9” to “EN 11”, “EN 13” to “EN 15”) corresponding to the V prize failure effect is selected. The probability that the V winning area in which the game ball enters is higher than the probability that it is the specific area 3038A is higher.

  By selecting an effect pattern based on such an effect pattern determination table, an effect (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) according to the success or failure of the V winning is performed as in the seventh embodiment. Thus, in this modification, it is suggested whether V winning or winning will be made before entering the V winning area (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D). be able to.

  In the above modification, based on the movement trajectory of the gaming ball on the clone 3001, the case has been described in which an effect (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) is performed according to the success or failure of the V winning. Hereinafter, in another modified example, a case in which an effect (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) is performed based on the movement locus of the gaming ball on the stage 3003 will be described.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows that one game ball is rolling on the stage 3003, and the present position of the game ball is shown as a game ball 120q. The game ball rolls on various stages on the stage 3003. FIG. 97 (b) shows two examples of such a track.

  The first example is that one gaming ball moves on the track of (III) and (iii). Similar to FIG. 97 (a), in this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming ball enters the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004b. The second example is that one gaming ball moves on the track of (IV) and (iv). In this case, the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming ball enters the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004a.

  As described above, among the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c, the sub CPU 201 enters a hole corresponding to any ball passage (a game ball passes through any ball passage 3004) To determine. Thereafter, based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 98 (b)) stored in the program ROM 202, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern according to the ball passage 3004 determined to pass.

  In the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (b), the range of random numbers and the effect pattern are defined in association with each other for the ball passage 3004 (the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c) There is. Similar to the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (a), the effect pattern includes information indicating the content of the effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V winning. Three types of V winning success effects (V winning success effects 1 to 3) are provided as effects corresponding to the success of the V winning (effects that indicate the success of the V winning), and effects (in accordance with the failure of the V winning) Three types of V prize failure rendering effects (V prize failure rendering effects 1 to 3) are provided as the effect of suggesting the failure of the V prize.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 90, the gaming ball is in the specific area 3038A depending on which ball passage 3004 of the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c passes through. The probability of entering the ball (the probability of winning a V) is different. Specifically, when the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A as compared to the case where the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004c (V The probability of winning) is high.

  Corresponding to this, in the effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004b, the effect pattern (“EN5” to “EN7”) corresponding to the V winning success effect The probability of being selected is higher than the probability of being selected the effect pattern (“EN 8”) corresponding to the V prize failure rendering effect. In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004b, the probability that the effect pattern (“EN5” to “EN7”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected is V when the game ball passes the ball passage 3004a. The probability that the effect pattern ("EN4") corresponding to the winning success effect is selected, and the effect pattern ("EN12") corresponding to the V winning success effect when the gaming ball passes the ball passage 3004c It is higher than the probability. In addition, when the effect pattern (“EN4” to “EN7”, “EN12”) corresponding to the V winning success effect is selected, the probability that the ball passage through which the game ball passes is the ball passage 3004 b is V winning success effect When the effect pattern (“EN4” to “EN7”, “EN12”) corresponding to is selected, it is higher than the probability that the ball passage through which the game ball passes is the ball passage 3004a or the ball passage 3004c. In addition, when the effect pattern (“EN4” to “EN7”, “EN12”) corresponding to the V prize success effect is selected, the probability that the ball passage through which the game ball passes is the ball passage 3004 b is V prize failure effect When the effect pattern (“EN1” to “EN3”, “EN8” to “EN11”) corresponding to is selected, the probability that the ball passage through which the game ball passes is the ball passage 3004 b is higher.

  By selecting an effect pattern based on such an effect pattern determination table, an effect (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) according to the success or failure of the V winning is performed as in the seventh embodiment. Thus, in this modification, it is possible to indicate whether the V winning is successful or fails before the gaming ball passes through the ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c).

  In the above modification, based on the movement locus of the gaming ball on the stage 3003, the case where the effect according to the success or failure of the V winning (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) is performed is described. Hereinafter, in another modification, it is detected that the game ball has entered the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c), and according to the detection, the effect (V according to the success or failure of the V winning) Description will be made of the case where an effect indicating the success or failure of a winning is performed.

  Here, in the seventh embodiment, an area within a predetermined range in the vicinity of the V winning area is a discharge area for each V winning area (specific area 3038A, and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D). It has been described that it is set as (see FIG. 39) (see FIG. 94). On the other hand, in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 99, with respect to the holes corresponding to the respective ball passages 3004 (3004a, 3004b, 3004c), the region within the predetermined range in the vicinity of the holes 39)). Thereby, the sub CPU 201 can determine whether or not the gaming ball has entered the hole corresponding to any of the ball passages 3004 as in the seventh embodiment, and the gaming ball has any ball. If it is determined that the ball has entered the hole corresponding to the passage 3004, the ball passage 3004 in which the game ball entered is any of the ball passages 3004a, 3004b, and 3004c. Can be recognized (see step S3602 in FIG. 93).

  Then, if it is determined that the gaming ball has entered the hole corresponding to any of the ball passages 3004, the sub CPU 201 is based on the effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 98 (b)) stored in the program ROM 202. Then, select an effect pattern according to the entered ball passage 3004. As a result, as in the above-described modification, an effect corresponding to the success or failure of the V winning (effect indicating the success or failure of the V winning) is performed. Thus, in this modification, before entering the V winning area (specific area 3038A and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) before V (at the time of entering ball passage 3004), V It can be suggested whether the winning will succeed or fail.

  The modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above.

<Supplementary Note 10>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, effects are usually performed based on start winnings etc., but the movement of the game ball up to the winning and the contents of the effects do not correspond, and both are separated It was common to have. Even in the technology for tracking the movement of the gaming ball as described above, the device for appropriately reflecting the tracking result of the gaming ball to the effect is insufficient, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect of the effect .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(10-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down,
A plurality of areas (specific area 3038A, and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) including specific areas advantageous to the player and in which gaming balls having flowed down the gaming area can enter the balls, respectively;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the effect is produced in a manner that suggests the probability that the one game ball will enter the specific area among the plurality of areas. Effect executing means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93) for executing
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification, a plurality of continuous frame images are sequentially acquired as a moving image obtained by photographing the gaming area, and the positions of the gaming balls included in each frame image are specified. Ru. Then, based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, effects (V prize success effect or V prize) in a mode that suggests the probability that one game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) Failure production) is performed. In this manner, by specifying the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image, the position of the gaming ball and the probability that the gaming ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) are associated with each other and reflected in the effect mode. Can improve the stage effect.

(10-2) The gaming machine according to (10-1) above,
It has a winning device (second big winning opening 54) which can enter the gaming ball which has flowed down the gaming area,
In the plurality of areas (the specific area 3038A and the nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D), one gaming ball entering the winning device can enter any one of the plurality of areas. It is provided each like
The position specifying means is
In a plurality of frame images obtained by photographing the game area after one game ball enters the winning device, the position of the one game ball included in each frame image is specified,
The effect executing means is
Based on the position of the one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, an effect corresponding to a change in the position of the one game ball after entering the winning device is executed.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above modification, a plurality of areas (V winning area) including the specific area (specific area 3038A) is one game in which the winning device (second large winning opening 54) is entered. A ball is provided so as to be able to enter one of the plurality of areas (V winning area). And, the specification of the position of the gaming ball is performed, particularly in a plurality of frame images obtained after one gaming ball enters the winning device (second large winning opening 54), and the position of the specified gaming ball is specified Based on the above, an effect (V prize success effect or V prize failure effect) according to the position change after entering the winning device (second large winning opening 54) of the gaming ball is performed. Thereby, it is possible to reflect the movement of the gaming ball after entering the winning device (second large winning opening 54) in the effect mode, so it is possible to further enhance the effect.

<Supplementary Note 11>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  By the way, in conventional pachinko gaming machines, effects are usually performed based on start winnings etc., but the movement of the game ball up to the winning and the contents of the effects do not correspond, and both are separated It was common to have. Even in the technology for tracking the movement of the gaming ball as described above, the device for appropriately reflecting the tracking result of the gaming ball to the effect is insufficient, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect of the effect .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(11-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can flow down,
A plurality of ball passages (a ball passage 3004a, a ball passage 3004b, and a ball passage 3004c) through which the game balls having flowed down the game area can pass respectively;
A plurality of areas (specific areas 3038A and nonspecific areas 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) including specific areas advantageous to the player and in which gaming balls having passed the ball passage can enter
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
And effect execution means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S3602 in FIG. 93) for executing the effect;
In the plurality of ball passages and the plurality of areas, when one gaming ball passes a specific ball passage (ball passage 3004 b) of the plurality of ball passages, the one gaming ball is the specific ball When passing through a ball passage other than the passage, the one game ball is provided so that the probability of entering the specific region (specific region 3038A) is different,
The effect executing means is
One ball passage determined as a ball passage through which the one game ball passes among the plurality of ball passages based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means Perform the production according to
A game machine characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification, a plurality of continuous frame images are sequentially acquired as a moving image obtained by photographing the gaming area, and the positions of the gaming balls included in each frame image are specified. Ru. Then, based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, one ball passage of the plurality of ball passages (the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c) is the one game It is determined as a ball passage through which the ball passes, and an effect (V prize success effect or V prize failure effect) according to the one ball passage is executed. Here, when one game ball passes through a specific ball passage (ball passage 3004b) among a plurality of ball passages, the one game ball is a ball passage other than a specific ball passage (ball passage 3004a or a ball passage) The probability that the one game ball enters the specific area (the specific area 3038A) differs in the case where it passes through the passage 3004c). Therefore, the effect (V winning success effect or V winning failure effect) according to the ball passage corresponds to the probability that the game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A). As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification, the position of the gaming ball and the gaming ball enter the specific area (specific area 3038A) by specifying the position of the gaming ball included in each frame image. Since it is possible to associate the probability of balling and be reflected in the effect mode, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification may be configured as follows.

(11-2) The gaming machine according to (11-1) above,
The position specifying means is
In a frame image obtained by photographing the game area after one game ball passes through one of the plurality of ball passages, the position of the one game ball is not specified,
It is characterized by

  For example, after the game ball enters a hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (while the game ball is passing through the ball passage 3004 or when the game ball is moving on the clone 3001), Identifying the position of the gaming ball due to the passage route having a complicated structure (for example, having a three-dimensional structure instead of being formed as a two-dimensional plane like the game area 12a) It may be difficult (to track). Further, for example, due to the positional relationship between the CCD camera 1000 and the clone 3001 or the ball passage 3004, it is also assumed that the game ball can not be included in the shooting range. There is also a possibility that the photographing of the gaming ball may be hindered by the structures existing around the clone 3001 and the ball passage 3004. In such a case, for example, the discharge area is set to the hole corresponding to the ball passage 3004 (see FIG. 99), and when the game ball enters the hole, the ID of the game ball is released. Then (see step S308 in FIG. 42), it is conceivable to remove the gaming ball from the tracking target. The clune 3001 or the ball passage 3004 may be set as a masking area (see FIG. 38).

  In such a case, after one gaming ball passes the ball passage (the ball passage 3004a, the ball passage 3004b, and the ball passage 3004c) (after the passage of the ball passage is started), the one game ball is Since the position in the frame image is not specified, it is not possible to grasp that the gaming ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) in the frame image. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above modification, by associating the ball passage 3004 with the effect mode, the effect (V winning success) according to the probability that the game ball enters the specific area (specific area 3038A) It is possible to perform an effect or a V prize failure effect).

  In the above, it has been described that the gaming state after the big hit ends in the probability changing gaming state when the V is won during the big hit (see FIG. 24), but it is possible to win the V during the small hit, A big hit may be started by winning a V in a small hit. The model of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a so-called V-preced ST machine or a so-called one-two-type mixer.

Eighth Embodiment
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description will be omitted for portions in which the description in the first to seventh embodiments is applicable also in the eighth embodiment.

  FIG. 100 is a partially exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing a projector unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 102 is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

<Projector unit>
As described in the first embodiment, the upper decoration unit 58 is provided in the upper region of the front surface of the glass door 4 (see FIG. 3). The upper decoration unit 58 is arranged to project forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The interior of the upper decoration unit 58 is formed in a cavity in which the projector unit B is accommodated (see FIGS. 100 and 102).

  As shown in FIG. 100, the projector unit B is detachably provided to the upper decoration unit 58. A frame member 4 b is provided on the back side of the glass door 4, and the projector unit B is attached to the top of the frame member 4 b.

  Such a projector unit B functions as a projection unit capable of projecting an image as an effect, and realizes so-called projection mapping. The projection mapping is generally for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and in the present embodiment, in addition to the entire front of the game board 12, a decorative member and a movable character By projecting an image based on presentation information according to the position and shape of the game ball or the like as a projection target, it is possible to realize a high-definition and powerful presentation.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the movement of the gaming ball in the gaming area 12a is tracked by the method described in the above embodiment (see FIG. 31), and based on the result obtained by the tracking, the gaming ball or the game The effect is produced by projecting an image near the sphere. The effects using such a projector unit B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. First, the configuration of the projector unit B will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the projector unit B includes a projector cover B1 housed detachably in the upper decoration unit 58, and a projector device body B2 attached to the back of the projector cover B1 and emitting illumination light including an image. A mirror member B3 attached to the front of the projector cover B1 so as to be disposed in front of the projector device main body B2 and reflecting light emitted from the projector device main body B2 toward the game board 12 disposed diagonally downward and backward have.

  The projector device body B2 is attached to the upper inner side surface of the projector cover B1. The projector device body B2 is mounted so that the mounting attitude and angle can be arbitrarily adjusted. As shown in FIG. 102, the projector device main body B2 emits the irradiation light emitted so as to form an image from a light source (not shown) toward the front mirror member B3.

  The mirror member B3 is attached to the inner surface of the front of the projector cover B1. The mirror member B3 is mounted so that the mounting posture and the angle can be arbitrarily adjusted. As shown in FIG. 102, the mirror member B3 reflects the light emitted from the projector device body B2 toward the display area 13a and the game area 12a.

  Although not shown, the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 8) has a projector control circuit, and a projector device body B2 is connected to the projector control circuit. The sub control circuit 200 transmits a drawing request for controlling the projector device main body B2 to the projector control circuit. Thus, the video output operation of the projector device body B2 is controlled by the projector control circuit.

  More specifically, the projector control circuit is for performing LED control, focus control, image processing and the like of the projector device main body B2. The projector device main body B2 includes an optical mechanism and a relay substrate as an electrical component, in addition to the projector control circuit. The projector device body B2 is connected to the sub control circuit 200 via the relay substrate. The sub control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit and projects the irradiation light toward the front of the game board 12 through the optical mechanism to display an image as a visual effect.

  The projector control circuit includes a control LSI, an EEPROM (registered trademark), a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit, an LED driver, and the like. The control LSI controls the DLP control circuit to project the irradiation light based on the command of the sub control circuit 200. The control LSI controls the focus mechanism to move the projection lens (not shown) in the direction of the optical axis based on the instruction of the sub control circuit 200, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM stores a control program by the control LSI and data related to setting and adjustment of the projector device body B2.

  The DLP system of the projector device body B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit, an LED driver, and an LED light source of an optical mechanism and a DMD. Under the control of the DLP control circuit, light reflected in a predetermined direction by the DMD proceeds to a lens unit (not shown), passes through a projection lens (not shown), and is incident on the mirror mechanism B3, and finally the mirror mechanism It is led to the front of the game board 12 by reflecting at B3. Thus, the irradiation light is projected onto the game board 12 to be projected, and an image according to the effect is formed.

<Demonstration mode determination processing>
In the first embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 30 has been described as the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the process shown in FIG. 103 is performed.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an effect mode determination process performed in the pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing projector projection content determination processing executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of effects using a projector.

  In the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 103, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a camera image analysis process (step S4001). The camera image analysis process is as described in detail in the first to seventh embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes projector projection content determination processing (step S4002). Here, projector projection content determination processing will be described using FIG.

  In the projector projection content determination process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not an effect pattern (projector effect pattern) for projecting an image by the projector is selected (step S4101). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the effect pattern selected in the command analysis process (see FIG. 92) or the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 93) is a projector effect pattern. The projector effect pattern corresponds to the effect of projecting an image in the vicinity of the game ball or the game ball by the projector unit B, and in the case of a "big hit", in the case of "V winning" or "V winning" It is an effect pattern that can be selected only when it fails.

  Specifically, in the command analysis process, if the received command is a big hit start command, the sub CPU 201 uses the effect pattern (projector effect pattern) and the liquid crystal display device 13 corresponding to the effect using the projector unit B. From the plurality of effect patterns including the effect pattern and the like corresponding to the effects, one effect pattern employed for the current effect is selected by lottery (see step S3503 in FIG. 92). The big hit start command is a command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 when a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game (see step S140 in FIG. 22).

  Further, in the effect mode determination process, as described in the seventh embodiment, the sub-CPU 201 determines the game ball based on the position information of the game ball specified in the camera image analysis process (see step S3601 in FIG. 93). If it is determined that one of the V winning areas (specific area 3038A and non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D) has entered the ball (that is, if it succeeds in "V winning" or "V winning") If there is a failure, the present effect is selected from a plurality of effect patterns including an effect pattern (projector effect pattern) corresponding to the effect using the projector unit B and an effect pattern corresponding to the effect using the liquid crystal display device 13 The one effect pattern to be adopted is selected by lottery (see step S3602).

  As in the case of receiving the jackpot start command, the effect pattern may be selected when the V prize success command or the V prize failure command is received. As described in the seventh embodiment, the V prize success command causes the sub control from the main control circuit 70 when the "V prize" is successful (when the gaming ball enters the specific area 3038A (see FIG. 90)). This is a command sent to the circuit 200. The V prize failure command causes the sub control circuit 200 from the main control circuit 70 to fail when the "V prize" fails (when the gaming ball enters any of the non-specific areas 3038B, 3038C, and 3038D (see FIG. 90)). Command sent to

  In step S4101 in FIG. 104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect pattern (projector effect pattern) corresponding to the effect using the projector unit B has been selected in the above processing.

  If it is determined that the projector effect pattern is not selected, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the projector effect pattern has been selected, the sub CPU 201 acquires the current position of the gaming ball, and determines it as the projection position by the projector unit B (step S4102).

  In this process, the sub CPU 201 specifies one game ball suitable for the projector unit B to project an image from among the plurality of game balls existing in the game area 12a. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is preset as a predetermined position (for example, a position that is easy to enter the player's field of view) based on the position information (see step S304 of FIG. 42) of each gaming ball stored in the work RAM 203. One game ball present at a position closest to the The sub CPU 201 determines the position of the one game ball as the projection position of the video.

Here, as described in the seventh embodiment, since the position of the game ball specified in this way is the position of the game ball at a time (4 ms) before the time corresponding to one frame, The game ball is considered to be moving from the position specified in the game medium tracking process (see FIG. 42). Here, sub CPU 201 can calculate velocity v and acceleration a at a time (4 ms) earlier corresponding to one frame (see steps S3104 and S3107 in FIG. 88), and these values can be calculated. Referring to the displacement of the position of the game ball at time corresponding to one frame (t), from the formulas for uniformly accelerated motion, it can be expected to ^{(vt + at 2/2)} . The sub CPU 201 may calculate the position of the gaming ball at the current time point using the calculation formula, and determine the calculated position as the projection position of the video. Alternatively, the position of the gaming ball at the current time may be calculated based on the function indicating the relationship between the “position of gaming ball” and the “time” described in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 97).

  Since the position of the gaming ball determined as the projection position of the image as described above is the position on the frame image (for example, the position on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 67), it will be described using FIG. As described above, the position on the frame image may be converted to the position on the game area 12a (for example, the position on the xy orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 89).

  After executing the processing of step S4102, the sub CPU 201 selects the projection content based on the type of the big hit and the success or failure of the V prize (step S4103).

  In this process, when the sub CPU 201 selects the projector effect pattern based on the "big hit" (see step S3503 in FIG. 92), the image surrounding the gaming ball in a circle (FIG. 105 (FIG. b) Select an effect pattern on which to project (see) as a confirmed effect pattern. The color of the image corresponding to the circle is determined by lottery according to the type of the big hit (see FIG. 13), and the color that is likely to be determined differs depending on the type of the big hit.

  In addition, when the sub CPU 201 selects the projector effect pattern based on the success of the "V winning" (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the image corresponding to the character "V" with respect to the gaming ball An effect pattern on which (see FIG. 105A) is projected is selected as a confirmed effect pattern. Further, when the sub-CPU 201 selects the projector effect pattern based on the failure of the "V prize" (see step S3602 in FIG. 93), the sub CPU 201 applies characters and symbols other than "V" to the gaming ball. An effect pattern on which a corresponding image is projected is selected as a confirmed effect pattern.

  In step S4103, the sub CPU 201 reflects (registers) the confirmed effect pattern selected as described above on the game data stored in the work RAM 203. Thereafter, the sub CPU 201 ends the present subroutine.

  The projector projection content determination process performed in step S4002 in FIG. 103 has been described above with reference to FIG. Description will be returned to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S4002, the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of steps S4003 to S4006, and ends the present subroutine.

  Since the processes of steps S4003 to S4006 are the same as the processes of steps S3603 to S3606 of FIG. 93, detailed description will be omitted, but in particular, the sub CPU 201 determines the registration registered in step S4103 of FIG. In accordance with the effect pattern, a request (drawing request) for controlling the projector device body B2 is generated. Based on the request, the projector device body B2 is controlled, and an effect of projecting an image in the vicinity of the game ball or the game ball is performed.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, a circle (called a circle for effect) of a color (red, blue, yellow, etc.) determined according to the type of big hit is the game board 12 around the game ball As a result of being displayed on the upper side, the game ball appears to be surrounded by the circle for effect (see FIG. 105 (b)). The circle for effect and the game ball (the shape in front view is a circle) are substantially concentric circles in front view, for example, the radius of the circle for effect is 1.5 times the radius of the game ball (1 (About 1 to 2 times). When the V winning is successful, the character "V" is displayed on the surface of the gaming ball. As a result, the character "V" and the game ball have an integrated appearance. Similarly, when the V winning is unsuccessful, characters or symbols other than "V" (for example, cross marks) are displayed on the surface of the gaming ball.

  Note that the image may be projected only for a short time, or may be projected continuously for a certain amount of time. Although the projection time of the image is not particularly limited, it is desirable that the projection position of the image is also temporally changed in accordance with the movement of the game ball because the game ball continues to move while the image is being projected. The sub CPU 201 can update the position information of the gaming ball, which changes constantly with the passage of time, as needed (see step S304 in FIG. 42). The projection position may be updated as needed. Alternatively, if a function indicating the relationship between the “position of gaming ball” and the “time” described above is used, the gaming ball is determined as the projection target of the video (see step S4102 in FIG. 104). The subsequent trajectory of can be predicted (see FIG. 97). Therefore, when one game ball to be projected is determined, video (moving image) data adjusted to such a track is generated in advance and set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203, the movement of the game ball As a result, the process of calculating the projection position of the video as needed becomes unnecessary.

  As described above, the image displayed by the projector can be displayed even while the position of the game ball is changing momentarily by changing the projection position of the image with time according to the movement of the game ball (as shown in FIG. It is possible to maintain the relative positional relationship between the game ball and the "V" or "yen"), and effect can be performed for a certain period of time while maintaining a sense of unity between the video and the game ball.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Supplementary Note 12>
Conventionally, there is known a technique for tracking the movement of a gaming ball by photographing the gaming ball rolling on a gaming area in a pachinko gaming machine with a photographing device such as a camera and analyzing an image obtained by photographing See JP 2005-237864).

  However, in the prior art as described above, the device for reflecting the tracking result of the gaming ball in the effect is insufficient, and there is room for improvement in enhancing the effect of the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the rendering effect.

  In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(12-1) A game board (game board 12) including a game area (game area 12a) in which game balls can be moved,
A projector (projector unit B) capable of projecting an image;
A photographing device (CCD camera 1000) arranged to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means (sub-CPU 201 for executing the process of step S 281 in FIG. 31) for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as a moving image obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means (a sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S284 to step S286 in FIG. 31) for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the projection to the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball or the one game ball Video projection means (sub CPU 201 for executing the processing of FIG. 104) for projecting video by the device;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, a plurality of continuous frame images are sequentially acquired as moving images obtained by photographing the gaming area, and the positions of the gaming balls included in each frame image are specified. Be done. Then, based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image, an image is projected onto the game board within a predetermined range from the one game ball or the one game ball. As a result, it is possible to create a visual effect not found in conventional gaming machines by the synergy of gaming balls and images, and it is possible to perform novel effects.

  Here, the "image projection means" projects an image onto a game board within a predetermined range from one game ball or one game ball, and a function of projecting an image onto one game ball, Of the functions for projecting an image onto a game board within a predetermined range from one game ball, it may have only one function and may not have the other function. It may be configured to be able to execute any one of the functions.

  In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that a circle for effect is displayed on the game board 12 within a predetermined range from the gaming ball as an image projected by the projector when it is a big hit (FIG. 105 (b )reference). Here, in appearance, in order to create a sense of unity between the video projected by the projector and the game ball, the circle for the effect may be displayed in a region near the game ball on the game board 12 desirable. For example, the above-mentioned predetermined range can be set as “a range in which the distance from the center of the one game ball is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball when the game machine is viewed from the front”. The image projected on the periphery of the gaming ball is not limited to a circle, and the gaming ball may be surrounded by a square, a rhombus, a triangle or the like.

  Also, although it has been described that the letter "V" is displayed on the gaming ball when the V prize is successful (see FIG. 105 (a)), not limited to "V", any letter or symbol or It is possible to display colors and the like on the gaming ball. For example, when the V winning is successful, the character "hit" may be displayed on the game ball, or a red color may be displayed on the game ball. In addition, when the V winning a prize fails, nothing may be displayed.

  Also, as described in the modification of the seventh embodiment (see FIGS. 97 to 99), the gaming ball enters the V winning area (specific area 3038A and nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D) Before the game ball (or FIG. 105 (a)) according to the V winning as in this embodiment is performed according to the movement locus of the game ball or the ball entering the ball passage 3004, the game ball (or It is also possible to indicate the probability of successful V winning by the characters, symbols, colors, etc. displayed on the game board in the vicinity of the game ball. For example, an effect (see FIG. 105 (a)) for displaying the letter "V" is adopted as "V prize success effect" in the effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 95 and 98), and "V prize failure effect" It is sufficient to adopt an effect of displaying characters other than "V" (or displaying nothing).

  In the case of a big hit or a successful V prize, the projector projects an image on the gaming ball (or in the vicinity of the gaming ball), while the liquid crystal display device also produces a big hit or V prize. It is possible to constitute so that such an effect may be performed. Furthermore, a screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector may be provided, and effects relating to a big hit or a V prize may also be performed on the screen. By configuring in this manner, the effect for the rolling game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball), the effect on the liquid crystal display device, and the effect on the screen are executed at the same timing, and these effects are provided to the player At the same time, it is possible to attract players by having them experience it, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

(12-2) The gaming machine according to (12-1) above,
The video projection means is
Change the projected position of the video over time according to the movement of the one game ball,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, since the projection position of the image changes with time according to the movement of the game ball, it is possible to interlock the movement of the game ball with the projected image. Yes, it can make more attractive renditions.

  In the eighth embodiment, the projector is described as projecting the image by the projector onto the game ball moving in the game area 12a or the game board 12 in the vicinity of the game ball, but in the present invention, the projector The game ball to which the image is projected is not limited to the game ball moving in the game area. For example, the game ball entered in the out port 55 (see FIG. 5) is kept in the area visible to the player for a certain period of time, and the projector projects the image on the game ball present in the area. It may be

<Modification>
FIG. 106 is a partially cutaway side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present modification, the projector unit B is not provided with a mirror member, and irradiation light including an image is irradiated directly from the projector device body B2 to the front of the game board 12 It is configured to Also with such a configuration, it is possible to realize the projector effect (see FIG. 105) described in the eighth embodiment.

  In the eighth embodiment, the irradiation light emitted from the projector device body B2 passes through the lower end portion of the upper decoration unit 58, so that the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper decoration unit 58. The lower end portion of the decoration unit 58 has a light transmitting property. On the other hand, in the present modification, the lower end portion of the upper decoration unit 58 is provided with a hole for passing the irradiation light emitted from the projector device main body B2. On the other hand, a protective glass 29 is separately provided in front of the protective glass 28. Thus, the player can be prevented from touching the projector device body B2 through the hole provided at the lower end portion of the upper decorative unit 58.

  FIG. 107 is an external perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 109 is a schematic side view showing a state of being projected onto the projection area from the projection means.

  Another modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. In the present invention, the arrangement positions of the photographing device (camera) and the projection device (projector) are not particularly limited, and the configuration as in this modification may be employed. In the present modification, a rear projector that projects irradiation light from the rear surface is employed as a projection device (projection means).

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present modification, for example, a game area 4095 in which game balls can roll down and a projection area provided on the back side of the game area 4095 Of the projection area 4121 and the second projection area 4141), and an opening 4009 (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game area 4095 can be viewed. A front frame 4007 rotatably supported by the main body frame 4001 in front of 4001 (a side facing the player) and a rear side of the main body frame 4001 (back in the depth direction of the gaming machine), And a holding frame 4011 for holding the projection means (the first projection means 4143 and the second projection means 4147) at a predetermined position.

  In the front frame 4007, various decoration members (top decoration 4019, right side decoration member 4021, left side decoration member 4023), a light transmission member unit 4067, storage means 4025, and a discharge handle (a player can directly operate the discharge device) Operation means) 4079, etc. are provided.

  The main body frame 4001 is provided with a main body frame opening 4003 having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 4009 at a predetermined position facing the front frame opening 4009. And a projection area (a first projection area 4121, a second projection area 4141) provided on the back side of the display unit 4095. Further, although not shown, there are also provided an audio effect device for performing effects by a predetermined voice, various control boards such as a main control board and a sub control board, relay boards, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 109, a CMOS camera 4053 (or a CCD camera) is provided on the side surface of the storage means 4025, that is, the predetermined side surface on the right side toward the storage means 4025 (the side surface facing the emission handle 4079). The orientation of the camera is set so as to be able to shoot an image in the direction of the game area 4095.

  Further, in this modification, in addition to the projection area (first projection area 4121) disposed behind the game area 4095, the upper projection area (second projection area) is positioned above the game area 4095. 4141) is provided. Therefore, if the second projection area 4141 located above the launcher 4091 and the decoration member 4093 in front of the launcher 4091 and the first projection area 4121 perform a presentation, a powerful presentation is provided to the player. It is possible to

  The projection area is disposed at the rear of the game board 4097, and a plurality of projection areas are disposed in the vertical direction, and a predetermined image is projected by the projection means described later. In this modification, a rear transmissive screen type of a predetermined shape is assumed, and two in the vertical direction of the gaming machine (vertical direction) are provided. In this modification, the lower projection area is referred to as a first projection area 4121 and the upper projection area is referred to as a second projection area 4141 for the sake of convenience.

  The first projection area 4121 is detachably attached to the main body frame 4001 so as to be disposed behind the game area 4095, and is formed flat and in the approximate center area of the game machine. A substantially rectangular screen is assumed having a convex area 4123 projecting in an arc shape toward the.

  The first projection area 4121 transparently displays, for example, information on the game result of the player via a first projection means 4143 described later, and is effectally displayed on the game board 4097 as a game information display area. For example, predetermined game information such as the current number of balls held by the player, the number of big hits, the number of continuations, and the number of probability change rushes is assumed.

  That is, when the player is playing a game against the gaming machine, the first projection area 4121 (game board 4097) is viewed so as to look down from slightly above. Therefore, as in the case of the convex area 4123 of the present modification, the game information is projected as described above as long as at least a part has the inclined surface 4123 a inclined obliquely upward when viewed from the front. Even in this case, game information or the like projected on the convex area 4123 can be easily viewed by the player. For example, in the case where the second projection area 4141 is provided as a main projection area to the player and the first projection area 4121 is provided as a sub projection area, it is considered that the frequency of the line of sight above is high. Therefore, when viewing the first projection area 4121 which is a sub projection area, the line of sight is directed from the upper side to the lower projection area, and thus information on the game result is displayed in the upper area of the inclined projection area. This makes it easier for the player to see the information displayed in the lower projection area.

  In the first projection area 4121, a through hole (light guide hole) of a predetermined shape is provided at a position corresponding to a predetermined place of the game board 4097. The through holes are formed, for example, at positions corresponding to the game nails provided on the game board 4097, slightly larger in diameter than the game nails. Thereby, the light projected from the first projection means 4143 can pass through the through hole provided in the first projection area 4121 to emit light from the base to the tip of the game nail provided on the game board 4097 it can. Further, it is assumed that the through holes are not only provided at the positions corresponding to the game nails, but also drilled in the positions corresponding to the predetermined positions of the game board 4097 or the positions corresponding to other game members in a predetermined shape. It is possible to respond according to the place where the light emission is produced. It is also possible to project an image on the gaming ball (or in the vicinity of the gaming ball) through such a through hole.

  The second projection area 4141 is detachably attached to the holding frame 4011 so as to vertically overlap in the vertical direction above the first projection area 4121 and is generally backward (view of the gaming machine from the front) A substantially rectangular screen formed in a concave surface recessed in the depth direction) is assumed, and for example, a predetermined character image or a decoration image or the like according to the presentation of a game is appropriately provided via a second projection means 4147 described later It shall be set.

  As described above, by making the second projection area 4141 concave in the depth direction of the gaming machine, the image projected on the second projection means 4147 through the second projection means 4147 is from the player in the depth direction. Because it looks three-dimensional, it is possible to effectively produce effects such as a character image projected on the effect of a game.

  The projection means is a projection device (rear projector) that projects a predetermined image, information about a game, etc. in a projection area, and is provided with a first projection area 4121 and a second projection area 4141 It is equipped in the holding frame 4011 arranged at the rear.

  The projection unit is provided one by one in each of the first projection area 4121 and the second projection area 4141 and corresponds to the first projection area 4121. The projection apparatus (upper projection apparatus) provided corresponding to the first projection means 4143 and the second projection area 4141 is referred to as a second projection means 4147 for convenience.

  The projection means used in the present modification is assumed to be a known general rear projector (projection device) capable of projecting various game-related images and information in the projection area, and in particular, the first projection means 143 There is a projection device (rear projector) capable of executing notification relating to game progress by changing the light emission mode by changing the projection light passing through the through holes provided in the projection area according to the game progress. It is employable and each arrange | positioned by the predetermined position of the holding frame 4011. FIG.

  The first projection means 4143 is held in a downward sloping shape in which the projection lens 4143a is lowered rearward through the horizontal frame 4015 of the holding frame 4011. That is, the projection lens 4143 a is held in the direction opposite to the direction of the first projection area 4121. The projection light is reflected by the reflecting mirror 4145 provided at an inclination of a predetermined angle via the fixed base 4013 attached to the holding frame 4011 in an inclined manner, and projected onto the first projection area 4121. .

  The second projection means 4147 is held so that the projection lens 4147 a is opposed to the second projection area 4141 straight through the lateral frame 4017 of the holding frame 4011. That is, the second projection means 4147 adopts a form of direct projection on the second projection area 4141. In FIG. 109, reference numeral 4200 indicates the optical paths (ideal optical paths) of the first projection means 4143 and the second projection means 4147, and the first projection area 4121 is the optical path of the first projection means 4143. Provided in 4200, a second projection area 4141 is provided in the light path 4200 of the second projection means 4147.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example is configured to make the gaming board as small as possible, and to secure a large space for the display area outside the gaming board. When adopting such a configuration, the player mainly sees the effect in the display area more than the rolling of the gaming ball in the gaming board (playing area), and the player sees too much eye for the rolling gaming ball It is thought that it does not aim at. On the other hand, in such a gaming machine, when a video is projected onto the gaming ball (or in the vicinity of the gaming ball), the player who is aware of the video will shift his gaze to the gaming ball upon that occasion. Conceivable. In this manner (with a normal gaming machine (a relatively large gaming machine having a gaming board, a gaming machine having a display device provided at the center of the gaming board, etc.), the gaming ball (or the vicinity of the gaming ball) It is possible to make the player feel unexpected, in that the effect is performed in a place where the player is not paying attention, as compared with the case where the same effect is performed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. .

  In particular, based on the effect of displaying an image obtained by camera shooting (the movement of the game ball specified by the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31)) in the display area or the result of the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31) When the effect to be executed (for example, V winning success effect) is performed in the display area, the movement of the game ball is precisely displayed or the presence in the effect is created as much as the display area is enlarged. can do. Further, when performing rendering using a video obtained by camera shooting, it is not necessary to store video data for rendering in advance, so it is possible to reduce the processing load for rendering. As an effect using an image obtained by camera shooting, for example, a game ball is in a predetermined area (for example, a V winning area shown in FIG. 90 (specific area 3038A and nonspecific area 3038B, 3038C, 3038D)) When entering the ball, effects such as playing a replay moving image of the entering ball can be mentioned based on the movement of the gaming ball specified by the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31). If the replay video is played back in slow motion, it is possible for the player to carefully confirm the movement of the gaming ball up to the entering of the ball. At that time, if the moving image is reproduced in a mode in which the vicinity of the area where the game ball enters is expanded, it is also possible to show the state of the game ball entering the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  However, also in the configuration like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described modification, a display area may be provided near the center of the game board (game area). As a result, if an effect is projected in the display area or game information such as the result of the game is displayed, an effect of projecting an image on the game ball (or in the vicinity of the game ball) is separately executed, It is possible to make the image display in the display area and the effect on the game ball (or the vicinity of the game ball) be synergistic, and it is possible to expect an improvement in the effect of the effect.

<Supplementary Note (Others)>
Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device by the establishment of a predetermined variable display start condition, such as the game ball passing through the start area provided in the game area where the launched game ball can roll. Variable display control means is provided to perform variable display control and control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variable display is performed, which is advantageous for the player when the identification information displayed and derived is a predetermined combination. There is known a pachinko gaming machine which is adapted to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called "big hit") (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13801).

  However, since the conventional pachinko gaming machine does not have the configuration and function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve the interest. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

  As described above, in the first to seventh embodiments, the gaming machine having no projector has been described, and in the eighth embodiment, the gaming machine having a projector has been described. Of course, the gaming machines according to the first to seventh embodiments may also include the projector as described in the eighth embodiment. Moreover, in the second embodiment, a pachislot gaming machine is described, and in the other embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine is described, but the items described in the second embodiment can be applied to the other embodiments. Conversely, the matters described in the other embodiments can be applied to the second embodiment. For example, the present invention can be applied to a pachislot machine as described in the second embodiment, and the pachislot machine may include the projector as described in the eighth embodiment. The configurations described in the first to eighth embodiments can be arbitrarily combined arbitrarily.

  In the embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the liquid crystal display device 13 produces an effect of visualizing the movement of the gaming ball based on the position information of the gaming ball obtained as a result of the tracking process. In the present invention, as described above, the image obtained by the camera shooting (the movement of the gaming ball specified by the camera image analysis process (see FIG. 31)) may be displayed on the display device as it is. . At that time, the movement of the gaming ball being tracked is displayed on the display device, and the display on the display device is configured to be erased for the gaming ball that has completed the tracking (the gaming ball whose ID has been released) It is also good. Further, when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine provided with a projector as described above, a screen capable of displaying an image projected by the projector is provided, and an image obtained by camera shooting (camera image analysis processing ( 31) may be displayed on the screen.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case of tracking the medals used in the gaming ball and the pachislot gaming machine in the pachinko gaming machine has been described. The tracking object in the present invention is not limited to these, and may be a simulated ball different from the gaming ball, other features, or a decorative member. Also, instead of an object, a person (a player, a game arcade manager, etc.) may be the tracking target. In the present specification, the term "object" also includes a person.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, when tracking the gaming ball in the pachinko gaming machine, the position of the gaming ball is represented by the position coordinates of the center of gravity of the gaming ball (for example, coordinates on the XY orthogonal coordinate plane shown in FIG. 67). It explained as that. In the present specification, the game ball (or other tracking object as described above) is an entity having a certain area on a ball position image (two-dimensional plane), and the term "center of gravity" The center of gravity on the dimensional plane, that is, the center of gravity when it is assumed that the figure (or circle if it is a game ball) is made of uniform thin material of density (weight is proportional to the area) (mathematical It refers to the center of gravity in the meaning, so-called geometric center of gravity. The position of the gaming ball (tracking object) can be represented using any point on the tracking object, not limited to the center of gravity. For example, when light reflected by the tracking object is detected as the tracking object on the image, the position of the tracking object may be represented by the center of the light spot. When the tracking target is a front view polygon, the position of the tracking target may be represented by the midpoint of one side (for example, the longest side). Also, position coordinates of the upper end portion, the lower end portion, the left end portion, the right end portion, etc. of the object to be tracked may be used. Further, when the object to be tracked is photographed from a plurality of angles or when it is photographed from an oblique angle, etc., the position of the object to be tracked may be represented not by two-dimensional coordinates but by three-dimensional coordinates. In that case, for example, the position of the tracking object may be represented on the basis of points (centers) equidistant from each vertex in the case where the tracking object is captured in three dimensions.

  In the embodiment described above, the position of the vanishing point (see FIG. 48A) is also described as the position coordinates of the center of gravity, but the position of the vanishing point is also the same as the gaming ball (tracking object) Not only the center of gravity but an arbitrary point at the vanishing point can be used. In the embodiment described above, it is assumed that the vanishing point has the same size as the gaming ball (the gaming ball that triggered the setting of the vanishing point) on the image, but the vanishing point is The size of the points may be different from the size of the tracked object. For example, even if the sizes of the objects to be tracked are not uniform but vary among the objects, the sizes of the vanishing points are unified (according to the area and volume of the objects to be tracked) By increasing or decreasing the size of the vanishing point), it is possible to accurately grasp the vanishing point existing in the vanishing detection area (see FIG. 48 (b)). Further, in the above-described embodiment, the detection of the overlap has been described as performing the determination based on the overlapping portion (see FIG. 48 (c)) of the gaming balls instead of the vanishing point, but the vanishing points overlap The determination may be performed based on the part. Also in this case, the size of the vanishing point is unified (the size of the vanishing point is increased or decreased according to the area or volume of the tracking target), so that the overlap detection area (see FIG. 48C) is obtained. It is possible to accurately grasp the existing overlap (overlapping portion).

  In the embodiment described above, various signals such as error signals (steps S1310 and S1318 in FIG. 65, steps S2358 and S2364 in FIG. 84, steps S2402 and S2405 in FIG. 85, and steps S3103 and S3106 in FIG. Although the case where step S3109, step S3112, step S3115, step S3704 of FIG. 96, etc.) is transmitted to the hall computer has been described, these signals may be transmitted to gaming devices other than the hall computer. . As gaming devices other than the hall computer, for example, sand, a data display, an island computer, a representative lamp, an out box and the like can be mentioned. Note that the number of gaming balls used by the player for playing a game (so-called out number) may be counted in the above-mentioned out box.

  The first to eighth embodiments have been described above as the embodiments of the present invention, but they are merely specific examples, and the present invention is not particularly limited, and specific configurations of respective means and the like are described. The design can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention is not.

  Also, in the above detailed description, characteristic parts are mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used to properly describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, it would be easy for a person skilled in the art to reconsider other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described herein. Therefore, the description of the claims should be considered to include equivalent configurations without departing from the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and the essence of the present application by the Patent Office and general public organizations, and engineers who belong to this technical field who is not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. To make it possible to make a prompt decision. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be assessed by the recitation of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted with sufficient consideration to the documents and the like already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes a computer-implemented process. The above description and expressions have been set forth for the purpose of being most efficiently understood by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process that is not self-consistent. In each process, transmission and reception of electric or magnetic signals, recording, and the like are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are merely used for the convenience of description. There is a need. Moreover, although the process in each process may be described by the expression common to human action, the process demonstrated in this specification is basically performed by various apparatuses. Also, other configurations required to perform each process are obvious from the above description.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 pachinko game machine 11 speaker 13 liquid crystal display 13a display area 23 effect button 39 displacement member 53 1st big winning opening 54 2nd big winning opening 54a shutter 59A-59E, 59e-59h LED
71 Main CPU
201 sub CPU
205 Display Control Circuit 206 Audio Control Circuit 207 LED Control Circuit 208 Drive Control Circuit 1000 CCD Camera

Claims (1)

A game board provided with a game area where game balls can flow down;
A plurality of areas including a specific area which is advantageous to the player and in which the game balls having flowed down the game area can each enter;
A photographing device disposed to be able to photograph the gaming area;
Frame image acquisition means for sequentially acquiring a plurality of continuous frame images as moving images obtained by photographing the game area;
Position specifying means for specifying the position of the game ball included in each frame image obtained by the frame image obtaining means;
Based on the position of one game ball included in each frame image specified by the position specifying means, the effect is produced in a manner that suggests the probability that the one game ball will enter the specific area among the plurality of areas. Effect executing means for executing
Equipped with
One game ball in a frame image has an area according to the distance from the photographing device to the game ball.